My iPhone Includes index [2nd ed] 9780789738233, 0789738236, 9780768686579, 0768686571

Table of contents :
Table of Contents......Page 4
P: Getting Started with iPhone......Page 16
Getting to Know iPhone's External Features......Page 17
Knowing Why It's Called a Multi-Touch Interface......Page 18
Preparing iTunes......Page 26
Using MobileMe with iPhone......Page 30
Using this Book......Page 36
1 Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls......Page 40
Creating Your Own Ringtones......Page 41
Setting Phone Sounds......Page 44
Configuring Phone Settings......Page 46
Making Calls......Page 49
Dialing with the Keypad......Page 50
Dialing with Contacts......Page 51
Dialing with Favorites......Page 52
Dialing with Recents......Page 53
Managing In-Process Calls......Page 54
Answering Calls......Page 59
Answering Calls When You're Already on a Call......Page 61
Working with Missed and Recent Calls......Page 62
Adding Caller Information to Favorites......Page 64
Using Visual Voicemail......Page 65
Recording a Greeting......Page 66
Listening to and Managing Voicemails......Page 68
Getting Information About Your Cell Account......Page 74
Configuring How Contacts Are Displayed......Page 78
Moving Contacts from MobileMe or Exchange Accounts to iPhone......Page 80
Moving Contacts from a Windows PC to iPhone......Page 82
Moving Contacts from a Mac to iPhone......Page 83
Creating New Contacts While Using iPhone......Page 84
Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually......Page 91
Using Contacts on iPhone......Page 100
Changing or Deleting Contacts......Page 102
Changing Contacts via Syncs......Page 103
Adding or Removing Information for an Existing Contact Manually......Page 104
Adding Information to an Existing Contact While Using iPhone......Page 106
Deleting Contacts Manually......Page 108
3 Listening to Audio and Watching Video......Page 110
Importing Audio CDs to the iTunes Library......Page 111
Purchasing Audio and Video from the iTunes Store......Page 113
Renting Movies from the iTunes Store......Page 116
Subscribing to Podcasts in the iTunes Store......Page 117
Building Audio and Video Playlists......Page 119
Building Audio and Video Smart Playlists......Page 120
Moving Content from the iTunes Library onto iPhone......Page 124
Using the iTunes Store Application to Add Audio and Video to iPhone......Page 128
Downloading Audio Content from iPhone's iTunes Store Application......Page 129
Using the Cover Flow Browser to Find and Play Music......Page 132
Using Playlists to Find Music......Page 135
Using Artists to Find Music......Page 137
Using Genres to Find Music......Page 139
Using the More Menu to Find Music......Page 141
Playing Music......Page 142
Viewing Albums......Page 144
Configure the iPod Control Bar......Page 145
Use the iPod Control Bar......Page 146
Finding and Listening to Podcasts......Page 147
Finding Video......Page 149
Watching Video......Page 150
Deleting Video......Page 151
Building and Editing an On-The-Go Playlist......Page 152
Using the iPhone Genius......Page 155
Configuring iPhone's iPod Toolbar......Page 158
Configuring iPhone's iPod Settings......Page 159
4 Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs......Page 166
Connecting to the Internet via Wi-Fi Networks......Page 167
Connecting to the Internet via 3G......Page 178
Connecting to Bluetooth Devices......Page 180
Connecting to VPNs......Page 183
5 Emailing......Page 188
Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone......Page 189
Using MobileMe to Configure Email Accounts on iPhone......Page 190
Syncing Email Accounts with a Windows PC......Page 192
Syncing Email Accounts with a Mac......Page 193
Configuring Gmail, Yahoo! Mail, or AOL Email Accounts on iPhone Manually......Page 194
Configuring Other Email Accounts on iPhone Manually......Page 196
Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone......Page 200
Configuring Exchange Email Accounts on iPhone Manually......Page 204
Configuring How Email is Retrieved......Page 207
Configuring Global Email Settings......Page 209
Changing Email Account Configurations......Page 213
Disabling Email Accounts......Page 214
Deleting Email Accounts......Page 215
Receiving and Reading Email......Page 216
Sending Email......Page 220
Replying to Email......Page 224
Forwarding Email......Page 225
Viewing Messages in a Folder......Page 231
6 Surfing the Web......Page 234
Configuring Safari Settings......Page 235
Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC to iPhone......Page 238
Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC onto iPhone via Sync......Page 239
Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC onto iPhone Using MobileMe......Page 240
Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone......Page 241
Moving Favorites from a Mac onto iPhone via Sync......Page 242
Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone Using MobileMe......Page 243
Moving to Websites via Bookmarks......Page 245
Moving to Websites by Typing a URL......Page 247
Viewing Websites......Page 249
Searching the Web......Page 251
Returning to Previous Websites......Page 252
Saving and Organizing Bookmarks......Page 253
Creating a Bookmark on the Home Screen......Page 260
Emailing a Link to a Webpage......Page 261
Completing Web Forms......Page 263
Opening and Managing Multiple Webpages at the Same Time......Page 264
7 Text Messaging......Page 268
Configuring the New Text Message Sound......Page 270
Sending Text Messages......Page 271
Receiving and Replying to Text Messages......Page 274
Working with Text Messages......Page 275
Conversing in Text......Page 276
Clearing a Conversation......Page 278
Deleting a Conversation......Page 279
8 Working with Date & Time and the Calendar......Page 282
Configuring iPhone's Date, Time, and Calendar Settings......Page 283
Telling Time with iPhone......Page 288
Using the Clock Application......Page 289
Setting and Using Alarms......Page 292
Changing Alarms......Page 295
Using iPhone as a Stopwatch......Page 297
Working with Calendars......Page 300
Syncing a Calendar with MobileMe on a Windows PC......Page 301
Syncing a Calendar with MobileMe on a Mac......Page 302
Syncing iPhone's Calendar with a MobileMe or Exchange Account......Page 303
Configuring iPhone Push Calendar Syncing......Page 304
Syncing iPhone's Calendar with Outlook on Windows PCs......Page 306
Syncing iPhone's Calendar with iCal on Macs......Page 307
Using iPhone's Calendar......Page 308
Adding Events to the Calendar by Accepting Invitations......Page 317
Taking Photos with iPhone......Page 322
Moving Photos from a Computer onto iPhone......Page 325
Moving Photos from a Windows PC onto iPhone......Page 326
Moving Photos from Email onto iPhone......Page 329
Viewing Photos Individually......Page 331
Viewing Photos as a Slideshow......Page 334
Deleting Photos from iPhone......Page 338
Using a Photo as Wallpaper......Page 339
Emailing a Photo......Page 340
Assigning a Photo to a Contact......Page 341
Sending a Photo to MobileMe......Page 344
Moving Photos from iPhone to a Computer......Page 345
10 Working with iPhone Applications......Page 350
Downloading Applications from the iTunes Store......Page 351
Moving Applications from Your Library onto iPhone......Page 353
Using the App Store to Find and Install iPhone Applications......Page 354
Using iPhone Applications You Install......Page 359
Maintaining iPhone Applications......Page 360
Removing Applications from iPhone......Page 364
Finding a Location by Searching......Page 366
Finding a Location with Bookmarks......Page 369
Finding Your Current Location......Page 372
Working with Maps......Page 374
Getting Directions......Page 377
11 Customizing iPhone......Page 382
Customizing the Home Screen......Page 383
Using Airplane Mode......Page 386
Configuring General Sound Settings......Page 387
Setting Screen Brightness......Page 389
Setting Wallpaper......Page 390
Configuring General Settings......Page 391
Maintaining iPhone......Page 404
Maintaining iTunes......Page 405
Maintaining iPhone's Software......Page 407
Maintaining iPhone's Power......Page 409
Solving iPhone Problems......Page 413
Restarting the Computer and iTunes......Page 414
Resetting iPhone......Page 415
Restoring iPhone......Page 417
Reinstalling iTunes......Page 419
Getting Help with iPhone Problems......Page 420
A......Page 421
C......Page 422
D......Page 423
E......Page 424
I......Page 425
M......Page 426
P......Page 428
S......Page 429
T......Page 430
W......Page 431
X - Y - Z......Page 432

Citation preview

™

Brad Miser

800 East 96th Street, Indianapolis, Indiana 46240 USA

My iPhone™, Second Edition Copyright © 2009 by Que Publishing

Associate Publisher Greg Wiegand

All rights reserved. No part of this book shall be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without written permission from the publisher. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Although every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this book, the publisher and author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.

Acquisition and Development Editor

ISBN-13: 978-0-7897-3823-3 ISBN-10: 0-7897-3823-6

Patrick Kanouse

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Project Editor

Laura Norman

Managing Editor

Mandie Frank Miser, Brad. My iPhone / Brad Miser. — 2nd ed.

Copy Editor Language Logistics, LLC

p. cm. Includes index.

Indexer

ISBN 978-0-7897-3823-3 1. iPhone (Smartphone) 2. Cellular telephones. 3. Digital music players. 4. Pocket computers. I. Title.

Ken Johnson

Proofreader

TK6570.M6M535 2008b

Amanda Gillum

621.3845’6—dc22 2008040537

Technical Editor Printed in the United States of America

Griff Partington

First Printing: October 2008

Trademarks

Publishing Coordinator

All terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or service marks have been appropriately capitalized. Que Publishing cannot attest to the accuracy of this information. Use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark.

Cindy J Teeters

Warning and Disclaimer

Anne Jones

Every effort has been made to make this book as complete and as accurate as possible, but no warranty or fitness is implied. The information provided is on an “as is” basis. The author and the publisher shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any loss or damages arising from the information contained in this book.

Bulk Sales Que Publishing offers excellent discounts on this book when ordered in quantity for bulk purchases or special sales. For more information, please contact U.S. Corporate and Government Sales 1-800-382-3419 [email protected] For sales outside of the U.S., please contact International Sales [email protected]

Designer

Composition Gloria Schurick

Table of Contents P

Getting Started with iPhone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Touring iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Getting to Know iPhone’s External Features . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Knowing Why It’s Called a Multi-Touch Interface . . . . . . . .5 Preparing iTunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Using MobileMe with iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Using this Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Configuring Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Creating Your Own Ringtones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Setting Phone Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Configuring Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Other Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Dialing with the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Dialing with Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Dialing with Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Dialing with Recents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Managing In-Process Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Receiving Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Answering Calls When You’re Already on a Call . . . . . . . .48 Managing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Working with Missed and Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Adding Caller Information to Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Using iPhone’s Headset for Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Using Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Recording a Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Listening to and Managing Voicemails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Getting Information About Your Cell Account . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

iv

2

My iPhone

Contents

Managing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Configuring How Contacts Are Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Getting Contact Information onto iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Moving Contacts from MobileMe or Exchange Accounts to iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Moving Contacts from a Windows PC to iPhone . . . . . . .69 Moving Contacts from a Mac to iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Creating New Contacts While Using iPhone . . . . . . . . . . .71 Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Using Contacts on iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Changing or Deleting Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Changing Contacts via Syncs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Adding or Removing Information for an Existing Contact Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Adding Information to an Existing Contact While Using iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Deleting Contacts Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Importing Audio CDs to the iTunes Library . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Purchasing Audio and Video from the iTunes Store . . .100 Renting Movies from the iTunes Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Subscribing to Podcasts in the iTunes Store . . . . . . . . . .104 Building Audio and Video Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Building Audio and Video Smart Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Moving Content from the iTunes Library onto iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Using the iTunes Store Application to Add Audio and Video to iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Downloading Audio Content from iPhone’s iTunes Store Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Listening to Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Using the Cover Flow Browser to Find and Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Contents

Using Playlists to Find Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Using Artists to Find Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Using Genres to Find Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Using the More Menu to Find Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Playing Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Viewing Albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Controlling Audio Content with the iPod Control Bar . . . .132 Configure the iPod Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Use the iPod Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Finding and Listening to Podcasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Finding and Watching Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Finding Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Watching Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Deleting Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Customizing iPhone for iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Building and Editing an On-The-Go Playlist . . . . . . . . . . .139 Using the iPhone Genius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Configuring iPhone’s iPod Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Configuring iPhone’s iPod Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Connecting to the Internet via Wi-Fi Networks . . . . . . .154 Connecting to the Internet via 3G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Connecting to the Internet via EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Connecting to VPNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

5

Emailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Using MobileMe to Configure Email Accounts on iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Syncing Email Accounts with a Windows PC . . . . . . . . . .179 Syncing Email Accounts with a Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

v

vi

My iPhone

Contents

Configuring Gmail, Yahoo! Mail, or AOL Email Accounts on iPhone Manually . . . . . . . . . .181 Configuring Other Email Accounts on iPhone Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Configuring Exchange Email Accounts on iPhone Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Configuring General Email Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Configuring How Email is Retrieved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Configuring Global Email Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Managing Email Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Changing Email Account Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Disabling Email Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Deleting Email Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Working with Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Receiving and Reading Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Sending Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Replying to Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Forwarding Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Viewing Messages in a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

6

Surfing the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Configuring Safari Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC to iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC onto iPhone via Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC onto iPhone Using MobileMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Moving Favorites from a Mac onto iPhone via Sync . . .229 Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone Using MobileMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Browsing the Web on iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Moving to Websites via Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Moving to Websites by Typing a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Contents

Viewing Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Searching the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Returning to Previous Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Saving and Organizing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Creating a Bookmark on the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . .247 Emailing a Link to a Webpage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Completing Web Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 Opening and Managing Multiple Webpages at the Same Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251

7

Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Configuring the New Text Message Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Sending Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 Receiving and Replying to Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Working with Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Conversing in Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263 Clearing a Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265 Deleting a Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar . . . . . . . . 269 Configuring iPhone’s Date, Time, and Calendar Settings . .270 Using iPhone as a Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Telling Time with iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Using the Clock Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 Setting and Using Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Changing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Managing Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Using iPhone as a Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Working with Calendars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Syncing a Calendar with MobileMe on a Windows PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Syncing a Calendar with MobileMe on a Mac . . . . . . . . .289 Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with a MobileMe or Exchange Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 Configuring iPhone Push Calendar Syncing . . . . . . . . . .291

vii

viii

My iPhone

Contents

Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with Outlook on Windows PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with iCal on Macs . . . . . . . . .294 Using iPhone’s Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Adding Events to the Calendar by Accepting Invitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Taking Photos with iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Moving Photos from a Computer onto iPhone . . . . . . . . . . .312 Moving Photos from a Windows PC onto iPhone . . . . .313 Moving Photos from Email onto iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316 Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone . . . . . . . . . . .318 Viewing Photos Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 Viewing Photos as a Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Deleting Photos from iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Using a Photo as Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Emailing a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Assigning a Photo to a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Sending a Photo to MobileMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Moving Photos from iPhone to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

10

Working with iPhone Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Using iTunes to Find and Install iPhone Applications . . . .338 Downloading Applications from the iTunes Store . . . .338 Moving Applications from Your Library onto iPhone . .340 Using the App Store to Find and Install iPhone Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Using iPhone Applications You Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Maintaining iPhone Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Removing Applications from iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Finding Your Way with Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Finding a Location by Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Finding a Location with Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Finding Your Current Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

Contents

Working with Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Getting Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364

11

Customizing iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Customizing the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Accessing iPhone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Using Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 Configuring General Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Setting Screen Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Setting Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Configuring General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems . . 391 Maintaining iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Maintaining iTunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Maintaining iPhone’s Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Maintaining iPhone’s Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Cleaning iPhone’s Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Solving iPhone Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Restarting iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Restarting the Computer and iTunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Resetting iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Restoring iPhone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Reinstalling iTunes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Getting Help with iPhone Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

I

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

ix

x

My iPhone

About the Author

About the Author Brad Miser has written extensively about technology, with his favorite topics being the amazing “i” gadgets, iPhone and iPod, that make it possible to take our lives with us while we are on the move. In addition to My iPhone, Brad has written many other books, including Absolute Beginner’s Guide to iPod and iTunes; Sleeping with the Enemy: Running Windows on a Mac (digital Shortcut); Special Edition Using Mac OS X Leopard; Absolute Beginner’s Guide to Homeschooling; Teach Yourself Visually MacBook Air; and MacBook Pro Portable Genius. He has also been an author, development editor, or technical editor on more than 50 other titles. He has written numerous articles and has been a featured speaker on various topics at Macworld Expo, at user group meetings, and in other venues. Brad is or has been a sales support specialist, the director of product and customer services, and the manager of education and support services for several software development companies. Previously, he was the lead proposal specialist for an aircraft engine manufacturer, a development editor for a computer book publisher, and a civilian aviation test officer/engineer for the U.S. Army. Brad holds a Bachelor of Science degree in mechanical engineering from California Polytechnic State University at San Luis Obispo and has received advanced education in maintainability engineering, business, and other topics. In addition to his passion for silicon-based technology, Brad likes to ride his steel-based technology, also known as a motorcycle, whenever and wherever possible. Originally from California, Brad now lives in Brownsburg, Indiana, with his wife Amy; their three daughters, Jill, Emily, and Grace; and a rabbit named Bun-Bun. Brad would love to hear about your experiences with this book (the good, the bad, and the ugly). You can write to him at [email protected].

Acknowledgments

xi

Dedication To those who have given the last full measure of devotion so that the rest of us can be free.

Acknowledgments To the following people on the My iPhone project team, my sincere appreciation for your hard work on this book: Laura Norman, my acquisitions and development editor, who enhanced the concept for this book and brought it to fruition. Marta Justak of Justak Literary Services, my agent, for getting me signed up for this project. Griff Partington, my technical editor, who did a great job to ensure that the information in this book is both accurate and useful. Chrissy White, my copy editor, who corrected my many misspellings, poor grammar, and other problems. Mandie Frank, my project editor, who skillfully managed the hundreds of files that it took to make this book. Anne Jones, for the interior design and cover of the book. Que’s production and sales team for printing the book and getting it into your hands.

xii

My iPhone

Reader Services

We Want to Hear from You! As the reader of this book, you are our most important critic and commentator. We value your opinion and want to know what we’re doing right, what we could do better, what areas you’d like to see us publish in, and any other words of wisdom you’re willing to pass our way. As an associate publisher for Que Publishing, I welcome your comments. You can email or write me directly to let me know what you did or didn’t like about this book—as well as what we can do to make our books better. Please note that I cannot help you with technical problems related to the topic of this book. We do have a User Services group, however, where I will forward specific technical questions related to the book. When you write, please be sure to include this book’s title and author as well as your name, email address, and phone number. I will carefully review your comments and share them with the author and editors who worked on the book. Email: [email protected] Mail:

Greg Wiegand Associate Publisher Que Publishing 800 East 96th Street Indianapolis, IN 46240 USA

Reader Services Visit our website and register this book at www.quepublishing.com/register for convenient access to any updates, downloads, or errata that might be available for this book.

This page intentionally left blank

Soon you’ll wonder how you ever got along without it!

Prologue

P Getting Started with iPhone The good news is that getting started with an iPhone is a simple, painless process. You’ve got your hands on one, so it’s time to get going. Because iPhone was activated when you purchased it, there’s no need to do any set up work before you can start using iPhone for all the great things you can do with it. In this prologue, you’ll get a tour of iPhone so you can use its controls and work with its interface quickly and easily. You’ll also learn about installing iPhone’s required partner, iTunes, that you use to move content onto iPhone and keep it in sync. You’ll also learn about an optional, but very valuable partner for iPhone, which is Apple’s MobileMe service. Last, you’ll learn a bit about how you can get the most out of this book.

4

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

Touring iPhone You’ll find that iPhone is one of the most amazing devices ever because of how well it is designed. It has only a few external features you need to understand. For most of the things you do, you’ll just use your fingers on iPhone’s screen (which just seems natural), and iPhone provides a consistent interface so you accomplish most tasks with similar steps.

Getting to Know iPhone’s External Features Take a quick look at iPhone’s physical controls and ports and learn to understand how you move around its screens.

Headphone port Wake/Sleep button Mute Off/On switch

Volume buttons

Home button Docking port

Touring iPhone

5

• Mute Off/On switch This switch determines whether iPhone makes sounds, such as ringing when a call comes in or making the alert noise for an event on a calendar. Slide it toward the front of iPhone to hear sounds; a bell icon appears on the screen to indicate that Mute is disabled. Slide it toward the back of iPhone to mute all iPhone sound; a red dot appears on the switch, and a bell with a line through it appears on iPhone’s screen to indicate that it is muted. When muted, iPhone vibrates to let you know something is happening (assuming vibrate is enabled). • Volume Press the upper part of the rocker switch to increase volume; press the lower part of the switch to decrease volume. The volume that is controlled depends on what you are doing. If iPhone isn’t busy, its ringer volume is controlled. If you are listening to music or watching video, the volume of what you are listening to or watching is controlled. If you are talking on the phone, the volume of the call is controlled. • Docking port Use this port to connect iPhone to a computer using the included USB cable. • Home button Press this button to move to the all-important iPhone Home screen. It can also perform other functions, such as displaying iPod controls when you press it twice. • Wake/Sleep button Press this to lock iPhone’s controls and put it to sleep. Press it again to wake iPhone from Sleep mode. Note that if you are using iPhone to listen to audio when you press this button, the music keeps playing while iPhone is locked. If you hold this button down for a few seconds while iPhone is on, you’re prompted to shut it down. If iPhone is turned off and you press this button, it starts up. • Headphone port

Plug iPhone’s earbud headphones into this port.

• Camera iPhone’s camera lens is located on the back of its case near the top.

Knowing Why It’s Called a Multi-Touch Interface Apple designed iPhone to be touched. The previous section describes the only physical controls iPhone has; as you saw, there aren’t many. Most of the time, you control iPhone by using your fingers on its screen to press buttons, select items on lists, scroll, zoom, type text, and so on. After you use it a while, you might want everything to work this way because it’s so easy and intuitive.

6

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

Application buttons

Website bookmark Primary functions

Most iPhone activities start at the Home screen, which you get to by pressing the Home button located at the bottom of iPhone. Along the bottom of the Home screen, you see the four major function buttons. Above those, you see applications on iPhone that do all sorts of cool things; as you add applications, the number of buttons increases. You can also create bookmarks for websites and store them as buttons on the Home screen. As you add applications and bookmarks, the number of pages of the Home screen increases so you can store them all on it. You can organize the buttons on the pages of the Home screen in any way you’d like. The following figures highlight the major ways you control iPhone.

Press buttons to use them.

Touring iPhone

Press an item to work with it.

Press a letter in the index to jump to it.

Drag your finger up and down to browse lists.

Drag your finger up, down, left, and right to scroll.

Unpinch your fingers or press twice to zoom in.

Pinch your fingers or press twice to zoom out.

Press a link to move to it.

7

8

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

Drag your finger to the right to move to the previous screen.

Drag your finger to the left to move to the next screen.

Press controls to activate them.

Rotate iPhone to change the screen’s orientation.

There are lots of things you do with iPhone that require you to type, and iPhone’s keyboard is pretty amazing. Whenever you need it, whether it’s for emailing, entering a website URL, sending a text message, and so on, it pops up automatically. To type, just press the keys. As you press each key, the character you pressed pops up in a small window so you can see what you entered, which is useful feedback for you (you also hear audio feedback if you haven’t disabled it). The keyboard includes all the standard keys you expect. To change from letters to numbers and special characters, just press the .?123 key (press the ABC key to return to letters). It also has contextual keys that appear when you need

Touring iPhone

9

them. For example, when you are entering a website address, the .com key appears so you can enter these four characters with a single press.

Use iPhone’s virtual keyboard to type.

iPhone tries to be helpful as you type.

If you type a word that iPhone doesn’t recognize, it makes a suggestion about what it thinks is the correct word in a pop-up box. To accept the suggestion, press the space key. To reject the suggestion, press the pop-up box to close it and keep what you typed. You can also use this feature for shorthand typing. For example, to type “I’ll” you can simply type “Ill” and iPhone will suggest “I’ll” which you can accept by pressing the space key. iPhone also attempts to correct the capitalization of what you type.

10

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

Drag the magnifying glass until the cursor is next to the text you want to change.

The magnifying glass shows you where the cursor is. Press text you want to edit.

To edit text, press the text you want to edit. A magnifying glass icon appears on the screen, and within it you see a magnified view of the location of the cursor. Drag the magnifying glass to where you want to make changes and then lift your finger from the screen; the cursor remains in that location, and you can use the keyboard to make changes to the text. Wi-Fi, 3G, or EDGE connection

Time Battery charge

Cell network and strength of signal

At the top of the screen, you see various icons that provide you with information, such as the state of iPhone’s battery, Airplane mode status, the kind of network you are connected to, and so on. Keep an eye on this area as you use iPhone.

Touring iPhone

11

Locked

Drag to the right to unlock iPhone.

When iPhone is asleep and you press the Wake/Sleep button or the Home button, iPhone wakes up, and its screen activates; you see the Unlock slider. Drag the slider to the right to unlock iPhone so that you can work with it. You move to the iPhone Home screen or to the last screen you were using.

The Time Is Always Handy If you use iPhone instead of a watch the way I do, just press the Wake/Sleep button. The current time and date appear; if you don’t unlock it, iPhone goes back to sleep after a few seconds.

In most cases, you should just put iPhone to sleep when you aren’t using it instead of shutting it off. It doesn’t use much power when it sleeps, and it wakes up quickly when you want to start using it again. (In fact, you seldom need to turn iPhone off.)

12

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

Setting ringer volume

To change iPhone’s volume, press the up or down volume buttons. An icon pops up to show you which volume you are changing and the relative volume setting. When the volume is set, release the volume button.

Drag to the right to shut down iPhone.

If you want to turn iPhone off, press and hold the Wake/Sleep button until the red slider appears at the top of the screen. Drag the slider to the right to shut down iPhone.

Preparing iTunes

13

To restart iPhone, press and hold the Wake/Sleep button until the Apple logo appears on the screen. In a moment, you see iPhone’s Home screen, and it’s ready for you to use again.

Activating iPhone When you purchased iPhone, it was activated for you, and the initial setup was done so that you were ready to start using it. In some cases, you need to complete the initial configuration by connecting iPhone to your computer and following the onscreen instructions to complete those few steps. You’ll know if this is the case for you the first time you connect iPhone to your computer. If you see a setup prompt, just work through its instructions, and then you’ll be ready to roll. If not, you’re already ready to get on with things.

Preparing iTunes

>>> Go Further

iTunes is the application you use to move content (music, podcasts, movies, and so on) and information (such as email account configurations) onto iPhone. You need to download and install iTunes on your computer or make sure that you are using the most current version if it’s already installed. To get started, jump into any of the following sections that apply to your particular situation.

iPHONE AND iTUNES This isn’t a book about iTunes, so I cover only the details you need to know to be able to use iPhone. iTunes is a powerful application that you can use to manage all your digital entertainment and, of course, to move content onto iPhone, CD, DVD, iPods, and so on. For more detailed information about iTunes, see my book Absolute Beginner’s Guide to iPod and iTunes, currently in its third edition. Even if you aren’t an absolute beginner, you’ll find lots of information there to help you get the most out of iTunes.

14

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

You might find yourself in one of two situations on the iTunes front. If you are a Windows user and have never used iTunes, you have to download and install it, which is covered in the next section (if iTunes is already installed, skip over that section). If you’re a Windows or Mac user and already have iTunes installed on your computer, update it to make sure that you are using the latest version; the section titled Updating iTunes covers how to do so. After iTunes is installed and updated, you should get an account at the iTunes Store, which enables you to purchase content or rent movies. As you might guess, there’s a section called Obtaining and Signing in to an iTunes Store Account if you don’t already have one.

>>>step-by-step Downloading and Installing iTunes on a Windows PC 1.

Open a web browser.

2.

Move to www.apple.com/ itunes/download/.

3.

Uncheck the two check boxes.

4.

Click Download iTunes Free. The installer application starts.

1

3

2

4

Preparing iTunes

5.

15

Follow the onscreen instructions to install iTunes.

Mac Installation Section Missing? If you happen to be wondering why there isn’t a section on installing iTunes on a Mac, it’s because Macs come with iTunes pre-installed. If you weren’t wondering, never mind.

5

Updating iTunes 1.

Open iTunes.

2.

On a Windows PC, choose Help, Check for Updates. On a Mac, choose iTunes, Check for Updates. The application checks your version of iTunes against the current version.

2

3. If you are using the current version, click OK to clear the dialog telling you so. If you aren’t using the current version, you’re prompted to download and install it. Follow the onscreen instructions to download and install the newer version.

3

16

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

>>>step-by-step Obtaining and Signing In to an iTunes Store Account 1.

Open iTunes.

2.

Click iTunes Store. You connect to the Internet and move into the iTunes Store.

3.

Click Sign In. The Sign In dialog appears.

2

1

3

Already Logged In? If you see an Apple ID instead of the Sign In button, iTunes is already logged in to an iTunes Store account. If the account is yours, skip the rest of these steps. If the account isn’t yours, click the account shown and click Sign Out so you can create your account.

4.

Click Create New Account. You move to the first screen in the account creation process.

5.

Read the information and follow the onscreen instructions to create an Apple ID. After you complete the steps, you receive your Apple ID and password.

4

Got an iTunes Store Account? You can log in to an existing iTunes Store account by entering your Apple ID or AOL screen name and password and then clicking Sign In. Skip the rest of these steps.

5

Using MobileMe with iPhone

6.

Click the Sign In button.

7.

Enter your Apple ID and password.

8.

Click Sign In. You are logged into your iTunes Store account.

7

17

8

Using MobileMe with iPhone Apple’s MobileMe service provides you with a number of features including online disk space, an email account, online photo gallery, and more. When it comes to iPhone, MobileMe offers one primary benefit, and it is a really good one. With MobileMe, you can keep your contacts, calendar, Web favorites, and MobileMe email in sync between computers and your iPhone wirelessly. Instead of having to connect iPhone to a computer to move information over the USB cable, the information is moved directly from the Internet onto iPhone via its Internet connection. Not only is this easier, but your information remains much more current on all your devices. MobileMe works by moving information from a computer or iPhone to the MobileMe “cloud” on the Internet. The information is then downloaded from the cloud to each device so that all devices have the same information on them. MobileMe isn’t free. Currently, an individual MobileMe account is $99 per year, while the cost of a family account is about $149 per year. However, you can sign up for a free trial account that is available for 60 days. At the end of that period, you can choose to cancel the account if you don’t find it valuable. There are three general steps required to use MobileMe with iPhone. One is to obtain a MobileMe account. The second is to configure MobileMe on your computers; this task is slightly different on Windows PCs or Macs, so there’s a section for each kind of computer. The third step is to configure iPhone to access the information provided by MobileMe; these tasks are described in the relevant chapters (for example, using MobileMe to sync calendar information is described in Chapter 8,“Working with Date & Time and the Calendar”).

18

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

>>>step-by-step Obtaining a MobileMe Account 1.

Use a Web browser to move to www.apple.com/mobileme/.

2.

Click Free Trial.

2

1

Your Member Name Is Important Be careful about what you choose as your member name; in addition to using this to log in to MobileMe, it becomes part of your email address. You can’t change this name after you’ve created your account.

3.

Follow the onscreen instructions to obtain your MobileMe account. At the end of the process, you’ll have a MobileMe member name and password. You use this information to access MobileMe services on all your devices.

3

Using MobileMe with iPhone

Configuring MobileMe on a Windows PC 1.

Open the MobileMe Preferences control panel. (If you don’t have this control panel, you aren’t using the current version of iTunes. Go back to the section called Updating iTunes and update your version.)

2.

Enter your MobileMe member name and password.

3.

Click Sign In. Your computer connects to your MobileMe account. In the Account Status section, you then see information about your account, such as the amount of disk space you have, when the account expires, and so on.

Exchange Handled Separately If you have an Exchange account, you don’t use MobileMe to sync your calendar or contact information. Instead you configure the Exchange account on iPhone and choose which information to sync with it (this is explained in Chapter 5,“Emailing”). These tasks are described in the relevant chapters, such as Chapter 8 for accessing your Exchange calendar.

19

1

2

3

20

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

4.

Click the Sync tab.

5.

Check the Sync with MobileMe check box.

6.

On the top drop-down menu, choose how frequently the sync happens. For example, to have the sync performed hourly, choose Every Hour. Choose Automatically to have the sync performed every time data changes or Manually to perform the sync only when you click the Sync Now button.

7.

If you want your MobileMe contact information stored in Outlook to be included in the sync, check the Contacts check box.

8.

If you want your MobileMe calendar information stored in Outlook to be included in the sync, check the Calendar check box.

9.

To have your bookmarks moved into the MobileMe cloud, check the Bookmarks check box and perform step 10. If you don’t want this, skip to step 11.

10.

Choose the web browser where the bookmarks you want to sync are maintained (Internet Explorer or Safari).

11.

Click OK. If you selected any option but Manually in step 6, the information you selected is moved from the computer to the MobileMe cloud where you can access it on iPhone, and the process is repeated according to the schedule you set. If you selected Manually, click the Sync Now button to move the information.

12.

Move to the section Managing MobileMe Syncs.

5

4

6

7 8 9

11

10

Using MobileMe with iPhone

Configuring MobileMe on a Mac 1.

Open the System Preferences application and click the MobileMe icon.

2.

Enter your member name and password.

3.

Click Sign In. Your account information is configured , and the MobileMe pane updates to show that you have configured MobileMe.

4.

Click the Sync tab.

5.

Check the Synchronize with MobileMe check box.

6.

On the pop-up menu, select how you want synchronizations to occur. You can choose Manually to sync manually; choose a time, such as Every Hour, to sync at those times; or choose Automatically to have syncs performed whenever included data changes.

7.

Check the check box next to each item you want to include in the sync.

8.

Click Sync Now. The information you selected is copied onto the MobileMe cloud where you can access it from iPhone. Future syncs happen according to the schedule you set, or if you selected Manually, you have to click the Sync Now button to sync your information.

9.

Move to the section Managing MobileMe Syncs.

21

1

2

5

7

3

4

6

8

22

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

Managing MobileMe Syncs The first time you sync information via MobileMe (or if you reset your sync options), you decide how you want information to be moved.You are prompted via the MobileMe Sync Alert dialog. 1.

2.

At the prompt, choose how you want information to be moved. Choose Merge all data if you want the data on MobileMe to be merged with the information on your computer. Choose Replace data on computer to replace the information on your computer with information stored on the MobileMe cloud. Choose Replace all data on MobileMe to have the information on your computer copied to the MobileMe cloud.

1

2

Click Sync. The sync proceeds.

During syncs, you are prompted when the amount of data changes beyond the limits you set on the MobileMe Preferences control panel or the MobileMe pane of the System Preferences application. For example, you may choose to be notified when more than 5% of the computer’s data will change. When this happens, you see a dialog that enables you to make selections about how data is moved. You can use the controls in this dialog to review the changes and accept or prevent them as you see fit. When you’ve decided, you click the appropriate Sync button to allow the sync to proceed. If these prompts get too annoying, move back to the MobileMe preferences and increase the percentage of data change that triggers a notification or disable the notifications entirely.

There’s More to MobileMe If you get a MobileMe account, make sure you explore all it has to offer, including the great Web applications for email, contacts, and calendars. You may find that its iDisk online disk space is worth the cost of an account on its own.

Using this Book

23

Using this Book This book has been designed to help you transform an iPhone into your iPhone by helping you learn to use it easily and quickly. As you can tell, the book relies heavily on pictures to show you how iPhone works. It is also task focused so that you can quickly learn the specific steps to follow to do all the cool things you can do with iPhone. Using iPhone involves lots of touching its screen with your fingers. When you need to press part of the screen, such as a button or keyboard, you see a callout with the step number pointing to where you need to press. When you need to drag or slide your finger along the screen, such as to browse lists, you see the following icon:

The directions you can drag are indicated with arrows. To zoom in or zoom out on screens, you unpinch or pinch, respectively, your fingers on the screen. These motions are indicated by the following icons:

When you need to press twice, such as to zoom out or in, you see the following icon:

When you need to rotate iPhone, you see this icon:

Because iTunes and iPhone work with both Windows computers and Macs, this book is also designed for both platforms. When there are significant differences, such as applications you use to store photos, you see task sections devoted to each type of computer. You can safely skip over sections focused on a type of computer you don’t use.

24

Prologue

Getting Started with iPhone

iPhone hardware is now in its second generation, which is typically called iPhone 3G because it can use AT&T’s or other provider’s high-speed wireless networks. However, first generation iPhones are still very capable, and with software updated to the current release, original iPhones can do almost everything that the second-generation iPhones can do. When there is an exception to this and original iPhones can’t do what’s being described, you’ll see a note so stating. Just skip over that information (of course, you could always upgrade to the current version of iPhone too!).

These Tips Won’t Cost You 18% Tips provide shortcuts or alternative ways to do things.

It’s Not All Good

>>> Go Further

As great as the iPhone is, there are a few areas in which it doesn’t excel. I use this element to point out some topics that I think are important for you to be aware of. When there’s a workaround to get by one of iPhone’s limitations, I’ll explain it. Sometimes, you’ll just have to wait for iPhone’s software to be updated or for new hardware to be released. Fortunately, you won’t see many of these sections in this book because iPhone is really a remarkable device.

THIS ISN’T A HUGE BOOK Because you’re looking at this book, I assume that you want to learn the most important things about iPhone as quickly and easily as possible rather than labor through a 1,000-page tome. So the book is designed to be short, sweet, and to the point. Occasionally, I make you aware of something that I didn’t have room to cover in the tasks. When you see this element, you find a summary of other tasks that you can do, but for which you won’t find detailed task descriptions. In most cases, you can figure out how to complete a task based on similarity to the detailed tasks, or you’ll find a reference that provides you with the details.

This page intentionally left blank

Press here to configure phone settings. Press here to make calls, manage contacts, listen to voicemail, and more.

In this chapter, you’ll explore all the cell phone functionality that iPhone has to offer. The topics include the following: B B B B B B

Configuring phone settings Making calls Receiving calls Managing calls Using visual voicemail Getting information about your cell account

1 3

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Although it’s also a lot of other great things, such as an iPod, web browser, email tool, and so on, there’s a reason the word phone is in iPhone’s name. It’s a feature-rich cell phone that includes one of iPhone’s best features, which is visual voicemail. Other useful features include a speaker phone, conference calling, and easy-to-use onscreen controls. Plus, iPhone’s phone functions are integrated with its other features. For example, when using the Maps application, you might find a location, such as a business, that you’re interested in contacting. You can call that location just by pressing the number you want to call directly from the Maps screen. No need to fumble around switching to phone mode and dialing the number manually. iPhone makes your mobile phone use quicker, easier, and smarter in so many ways, as you’ll see in the pages that follow.

28

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Configuring Phone Settings Before jumping into iPhone calling, take a few minutes to configure iPhone’s phone functions to work the way you want them to. To start, move to iPhone’s Home screen by pressing the Home button at the bottom of iPhone. On the Home screen, press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

>>>step-by-step Creating Your Own Ringtones Of course, one of the most fun phone settings are the ringtones you hear when you receive calls. iPhone includes quite a collection of ringtones from which you can choose. To make your ringtones more custom, you can create them from selected songs you can purchase in the iTunes Store. There are two steps to this. In the first, you create the ringtone. In the second, you move the ringtone onto iPhone so you can select it.

iTunes Store Info You can find out how to access the iTunes Store to buy and download music in Chapter 3,“Listening to Audio and Watching Video.”

Press to configure sound settings.

Press to configure phone settings.

Configuring Phone Settings

29

Creating a Ringtone in iTunes To use a song as a ringtone, you must purchase it from the iTunes Store. (If you’ve imported a ringtone-enabled song from another source, such as a CD, you won’t be able to create a ringtone from it; you have to buy it from the iTunes Store.) Songs that are ringtone-enabled are marked with the ringtone icon, which is a bell. After you’ve purchased a ringtone-enabled song and downloaded it, you can convert it into a ringtone; note there is an additional charge of $.99 to do this. Here’s how to create a ringtone for a ringtone-enabled song in your library.

Ringtone-enabled songs

1. In iTunes, select a song that you want to use as a ringtone by searching or browsing your library. Ringtone-enabled songs are marked with the same icon that they are in the iTunes Store.You can easily find all your ringtoneenabled music by selecting Music on the iTunes Source list and ensuring All is selected in each column of the Browser.Then sort the list by the Ringtone-enabled column.

1

2. Right-click (or Control+click) the song you want to use as a ringtone. 3.

Select Create Ringtone. The Ringtone tool appears at the bottom of the iTunes window, and the song you selected is added to it. By default, the first 15 seconds of the song is selected; the part that is the ringtone is highlighted in a blue select box. You can create a ringtone of up to any 30 seconds of the song.

2

3

30

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

4.

Click Play. The selected ringtone plays and loops as you work on it.

5.

Drag the right edge of the selection box until it is at the end of the ringtone.

6. Drag the left edge of the selection box until it is at the start of the ringtone.The length of the ringtone is shown at the bottom of the selection box.The ringtone plays and repeats as you make changes.

6

5

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the selection box contains exactly what you want to use as a ringtone. 8.

8

When the ringtone is right, click Buy. If you aren’t logged into your iTunes Store account, you are prompted to do so. The ringtone you created is saved to the Ringtones area within your library.

NO LIMITS

>>> Go Further

9.

Use the Looping pop-up menu to determine the amount of gap between the loops of the ringtone when it rings. The default is .5 seconds, but you can increase this if you want more of a pause between repetitions.

Creating ringtones from iTunes Store music is good, but it is somewhat limiting because you can only use tunes that are ringtone enabled. And you have to pay $.99 for each ringtone (even if you’ve already purchased the song). If you want to be able to use any song or audio as a ringtone, you need an application that provides this capability. Do a Web search to find one. One of my favorites for Macs is iToner by Ambrosia Software (www.ambrosiasw.com/utilities/iToner/).

9

Configuring Phone Settings

31

>>>step-by-step Moving Ringtones onto iPhone After you’ve created a ringtone using iTunes, you can move it onto iPhone. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and select it on the iTunes Source list.

2.

Click the Ringtones tab. The ringtones you’ve created are shown in the box below Selected Ringtones.

3.

Check the Sync ringtones check box.

4.

To move all of your ringtones onto iPhone, click All ringtones.

5.

To move only selected ringtones onto iPhone, click Selected ringtones and then check the check box next to each ringtone you want to move onto iPhone.

6.

Click Sync or Apply. A sync is performed, and the ringtones are moved onto iPhone where you can use them.

4

1

3

5

2

6

Setting Phone Sounds You can set iPhone to play specific sounds for various events, such as a ringtone, receiving a voicemail message, and so on. 1.

Press the Home button to move to the Home screen.

2.

Press Settings.

2

32

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

3.

On the Settings screen, press Sounds. The Sounds screen appears.

4.

To prevent iPhone from vibrating when you’ve silenced the ringer, press the Vibrate ON button. The status becomes OFF, and iPhone won’t vibrate when you have silenced it using the Mute switch. Press OFF to re-enable vibration.

5.

To prevent iPhone from vibrating when the ringer is active, press the Vibrate ON button. The status becomes OFF, and iPhone won’t vibrate when the ringer sounds to indicate you’re receiving a call or when some other action for which sound is enabled occurs.

6.

To increase the volume level of ringer sounds, drag the slider to the right; drag it to the left to lower the volume of ringer sounds.

7. Press Ringtone or press the name of the current ringtone.The Ringtone screen appears. In the Custom section, you see ringtones you’ve created. In the Standard section, you see iPhone’s default ringtones. 8.

9.

Listen to a ringtone by pressing its name. The ringtone is marked with a check mark to show you that it is the active ringtone, and it plays. Browse the screen and keep trying sounds until you find the one you want to use as the ringtone.

10. Press Sounds. You move back to the Sounds screen, and the Ringtone area shows the sound you selected.

3

4 5 6 7

10 8 9

Configuring Phone Settings

11.

12.

If you don’t want to hear a sound when you receive a new voicemail, press New Voicemail ON. Its status becomes OFF, and you won’t hear a sound when you receive voicemail.

33

12

Press Settings. You move back to the Settings screen.

Hearing Things

11

If you want to hear any of the action sounds, such as New Voicemail, Press ON to turn that sound off and then press OFF to turn it back on. When you do, you hear the sound that plays when the related event occurs.

Configuring Phone Settings There are a number of settings you can use to configure the way the phone functions work. 1.

Press the Home button to move to the Home screen.

2.

Press Settings.

3.

Drag down the Settings screen until you see Phone.

4.

Press Phone. The Phone screen appears.

3

4

34

5.

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

If you don’t want the correct prefixes added to U.S. phone numbers when you dial them from outside the United States, press ON. It becomes OFF to show you that you have to add any prefixes manually when dialing a U.S. number from outside the United States.

6.

To forward your calls to another number, perform steps 7 through 11; if you don’t want to forward calls, skip to step 12.

7.

Press Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding screen appears.

8.

To forward calls, press OFF. It becomes ON to show you that call forwarding is active. The Forwarding To screen appears.

9.

Enter the number to which you want to forward calls. Include the number’s area code. You can use the special symbols located in the lower-left corner of the keypad to enter pauses and such.

10. Press Call Forwarding. iPhone saves the number, and you return to the Call Forwarding screen. The number to which iPhone will forward calls shows next to the Forwarding To text.

5

7

8

10 9

11. Press Phone. You move back to the Phone settings screen.

11

Configuring Phone Settings

12.

To disable call waiting, press Call Waiting, and the Call Waiting screen appears; to leave Call Waiting active, skip to step 15.

13.

To disable call waiting, press ON. Its status becomes OFF. When call waiting is turned off and you receive a second call while you’re already on another call, the second call immediately goes to voicemail.

14.

Press Phone.

15.

To hide your information when you make calls, press Show My Caller ID; to leave it showing, skip the rest of these steps.

16.

Press ON. The status becomes OFF to show you that your information won’t be transmitted when you make a call.

17.

Press Phone. You return to the Phone screen and are ready to use iPhone to make and receive calls.

35

12

14 13

15

17 16

36

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Other Phone Settings TTY devices enable hearing-impaired people to use a telephone. To use TTY with iPhone, you need an adapter to connect iPhone to a TTY device. You also need to turn TTY support on by pressing the TTY OFF button, which becomes ON to show you that TTY support is active. The Change Voicemail Password command enables you to reset your voicemail password; this is covered at the end of the chapter. The SIM PIN setting enables you to associate a personal ID number, or PIN, with the SIM (subscriber identity module) card in iPhone. You can remove this card from iPhone and install it in other phones that support these cards to be able to use your account with a different phone. If you set a PIN, that PIN is required to be able to use the card in a different phone. The AT&T Services option (US markets) enables you to get information about your account. This is covered at the end of this chapter.

Which Network? Although iPhone currently supports only the default network for the country in which you purchased it, when you are in different countries, you might see something other than that network next to the strength bars. The specific network you see doesn’t really matter; what counts is the strength of the signal you receive. That is, the network you use doesn’t matter except for roaming charges, which can be significant depending on where you use iPhone and what your default network is. Before you travel outside of your default network’s coverage, check with that network to determine the roaming rates that apply to where you are going. Also see if there is a discounted roaming plan for that location. If you don’t do this before you leave, you might get a nasty surprise when the bill comes in and you see substantial roaming charges.

Making Calls There are a number of ways to make calls with iPhone, but after a call is in progress, you can manage it in the same way no matter how you started.

Making Calls

37

>>>step-by-step Dialing with the Keypad The most obvious way to make a call is to dial the number. 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone. You move to the Phone screen.

2.

If you haven’t made a call from your current location before, check the signal strength to make sure that you can reach the network. As long as you see at least one bar, you should be able to make and receive calls.

3.

Press the Keypad button. The keypad appears if iPhone isn’t already displaying it.

4.

Press numbers on the keypad to dial the number you want to call. If you dial a number associated with one or more contacts, you see the contact’s name just under the number.

5.

Press Call. iPhone dials the number, and the Call screen appears.

6.

Use the Call screen to manage the call; see Managing In-Process Calls later in this section for the details.

1 2 Number being dialed

Name of contact if number is associated with one

4 5 3

6

38

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Dialing with Contacts iPhone has a complete contact manager so that you can store phone numbers for people and organizations. (You’ll learn how to configure your contacts in Chapter 2, “Managing Contacts.”) To make a call using a contact, follow these steps. 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone. You move to the Phone screen.

2.

If you haven’t made a call from your current location before, check the signal strength to make sure that you can reach the network. As long as you see at least one bar, you should be able to make and receive calls.

3.

Press the Contacts button. The All Contacts screen appears.

4.

Drag your finger up and down to browse the list. The faster you drag up or down, the faster you scroll.

5.

To jump to a specific section of the list, click a letter on the index.

6.

When you see the contact you want to call, press it. The contact’s Info screen appears.

7.

Press the number you want to dial. iPhone dials the number, and the Call screen appears.

8.

Use the Call screen to manage the call; see Managing In-Process Calls later in this section for the details.

2 5 6

4

3

7

8

Making Calls

39

Dialing with Favorites You can save contacts and phone numbers as favorites to make dialing them even simpler. (You learn how to save favorites in various locations later in this chapter and in Chapter 2.) 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone. You move to the Phone screen.

2.

If you haven’t made a call from your current location before, check the signal strength to make sure that you can reach the network. As long as you see at least one bar, you should be able to make and receive calls.

3.

Press the Favorites button. The Favorites screen appears.

4.

Drag up or down the list until you see the favorite you want to call.

5.

Press the favorite you want to call. iPhone dials the number, and the Call screen appears.

6.

Use the Call screen to manage the call; see Managing In-Process Calls later in this section for the details.

2

5

4

3

6

40

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Dialing with Recents

2

4

As you make, receive, or miss calls, iPhone keeps track of all the numbers for you. You can use the recent list to make calls. 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone. You move to the Phone screen.

2.

As long as you see at least one bar, you should be able to make and receive calls.

3.

Press the Recents button. The Recents screen appears.

4.

Press All to see all calls.

5.

Press Missed to see only calls you missed.

6.

If necessary, drag your finger up or down the screen to browse the list of calls.

3

5 7

8

6

7. To call the number associated with a recent call, press the title of the call, such as a person’s name. iPhone dials the number, and the Call screen appears. Skip to step 11. 8.

To get more information about a recent call, press its Info button.

9. Read the information about the call. For example, if the call is related to someone in your Contacts list, you see detailed information for that contact.The number associated with the call is highlighted in red. 10.

Press a number on the Info screen. iPhone dials the number, and the Call screen appears.

9

10

Making Calls

11.

41

Use the Call screen to manage the call; see Managing In-Process Calls later in this section for the details.

Going Back To return to the Recents screen without making a call, press Recent Calls.

11

Managing In-Process Calls When you place a call, there are several ways to manage it.The most obvious is to place iPhone next to your ear and use iPhone like any other phone you’ve ever used. As you place iPhone next to your head, its screen becomes disabled so that you don’t accidentally press onscreen buttons.When you take iPhone away from your ear, the Call screen appears again, and iPhone enables its controls.

Call status or duration

Contact name and photo if available

Press to mute call.

Press to put call on speaker phone. Press to enter numbers during call.

Press to add another call to the current one.

Press to add another call via contact information. Press to put call on hold.

Press to hang up.

42

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Nobody’s Perfect If iPhone can’t complete the call for some reason, such as not having a strong enough signal, the Call Failed screen appears. Press Call Back to try again or press Done to give up. When you press Done, you return to the screen from which you came.

Some of the other things you can do while on a call might not be so obvious, as you’ll learn in the next few tasks.

>>>step-by-step Entering Numbers During a Call You often need to enter numbers during a call, such as to log in to a voice mail system, access an account, and so on. 1.

Place a call using any of the methods you’ve learned so far. The Call screen appears.

2.

Press the Keypad button. The keypad appears on the screen.

3.

Press the numbers.

4.

When you’re done, press Hide Keypad. You return to the Call screen.

2

3

4

Making Calls

43

Making Conference Calls iPhone makes it easy to talk to multiple people at the same time. You can have two separate calls going on at any point in time. You can have more calls going on by merging them together. 1.

Place a call using any of the methods you’ve learned so far. The Call screen appears.

2.

Press add call. The Create a New Call screen appears.

2

Similar but Different If you press contacts instead of add call, you move directly into the Contacts screen.This might save you one screen press if the person you want to add to the call is in your contacts list.

3.

4.

Press the button you want to use to place the next call. Press Favorites to call a favorite, press Recents to use the Recents list, press Contacts to place the call via contacts, or press Keypad to dial the number. These work just as they do when you start a new call. Place the call using the option you selected in step 3. Doing so places the first call on hold and moves you back to the Call screen while iPhone makes the second call. The first call’s information appears at the top of the screen, including the word HOLD so that you know the call is on hold. iPhone displays the second call just below that, and it is currently the active call.

4

3

44

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

5.

Talk to the second person you called; the first remains on hold.

6.

To switch to the first call, press it on the list. This places the second call on hold and moves it to the top of the call list, while the first call becomes active again.

7.

First call

6 5 Second call

To join the calls so that all parties can hear each other, press merge calls. iPhone combines the two calls, and you see a single entry at the top of the screen to reflect this.

7

Merging Calls As you merge calls, iPhone attempts to display the names of the callers at the top of the Call screen. As the text increases, iPhone scrolls it so that you can read it. Eventually, iPhone gives up and replaces the names with the word Conference.

8.

To add another call, repeat steps 2 though 4. Each time you merge calls, the second line becomes free so that you can add more calls.

9.

To manage a conference call, press Conference or the names shown at the top of the screen. The Conference screen appears.

9

8

Making Calls

10.

To speak with one of the callers privately, press Private. Doing so places the call on hold and returns you to the Call screen showing information about the active call. You can merge the calls again by pressing merge calls.

11.

To remove a call from the conference, press the unlock button. The END CALL button appears.

12.

To remove a caller from the call, press END CALL. iPhone disconnects the caller from the conference call. You return to the Call screen and see information about the active call.

13.

To move back to the Call screen, press Back. You move to the Call screen and can continue working with the call, such as adding more people to it.

45

10 11

13

12

Swap ‘Em Out You can also swap calls by pressing the Swap button.

14. To end the call for all callers, press End Call.

Time Multiplier When you have multiple calls combined into one, the minutes for each call continue to count individually. So if you’ve joined three people into one call, each minute of the call counts as three minutes against your calling plan.

14

46

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Receiving Calls Receiving calls on iPhone enables you to access the same great tools you can use when you make calls, plus a few more for good measure.

Answering Calls When iPhone rings, it’s time to answer the call—or not. If you configured the ringer to ring, you hear the general ringtone or one associated with the caller when a call comes in. If vibrate is turned on, iPhone vibrates whether the ringer is on or not. And if those two ways aren’t enough, a message appears on iPhone’s screen to show you information about the incoming call.

Information about who’s calling, including photo if available

Send it to voicemail.

Answer the call.

If iPhone is locked when a call comes in, drag the slider to the right to answer it.

Drag to the right to answer.

Receiving Calls

47

When you receive a call, you have the following options: • Answer Press Answer to take the call. You move to the Call screen and can work with the call like one you placed from iPhone. For example, you can add a call, merge calls, place the call on hold, end the call, and so on. • Decline If you press Decline, iPhone immediately routes the call to voicemail. You can also decline a call by pressing the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly on iPhone’s top. • Silence a call To silence the ringer without sending the call to voicemail, press the Sleep/Wake button on iPhone’s top once or press either the upper or lower part of the Volume button on iPhone’s left side. The call continues to come in, and you can answer it even though you shut the ringer off for the call.

Silencio! To turn iPhone’s ringer off temporarily, slide the Ringer switch located above the Volume switch on iPhone’s left side toward the back so that the red dot appears. The no-ringer icon (a bell with a slash through it) appears on the screen to let you know that you turned the ringer off. To turn it back on again, slide the switch toward iPhone’s front. The bell icon appears on the screen to show you that the ringer is active again. To set the ringer’s volume, use the Volume switch on iPhone’s left side when you aren’t in a call and aren’t listening to music or video via its iPod functions.

48

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Answering Calls When You’re Already on a Call As you saw earlier, iPhone can manage multiple calls at the same time. If you are on a call and another call comes in, you have a number of ways to respond. Information about the new call coming in

Press to send incoming call to voicemail. Press to put current call on hold and answer.

Press to end current call and answer.

• Decline

Press Ignore to send the incoming call directly to voicemail.

• Place the first call on hold and answer the second Press Hold Call + Answer to place the current call on hold and answer the second one. After you do this, you can manage the two calls just as when you called two numbers from iPhone. For example, you can place the second call on hold and move back to the first one, merge the calls, add more calls, and so on. • End the first call and answer the second Press End Call + Answer to terminate the active call and answer the incoming call.

Auto-Mute If you are listening to music or video, the iPod function automatically pauses when a call comes in. When the call ends, the music or video picks up right where it left off.

Managing Calls

49

Managing Calls You’ve already learned most of what you need to know to use iPhone’s cell phone functions. In the following sections, you learn the rest.

>>>step-by-step Working with Missed and Recent Calls You can use iPhone’s Recents list to get information about the calls you’ve made with iPhone, well…recently.This includes both calls that were completed and calls that were missed. 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone. You move to the Phone page. At the bottom of the screen, on the Recents button, you see an indicator if you missed any calls since you last looked at the list, along with the number that you missed.

2.

Press Recents. The Recents list appears.

3.

Press All to see all recent calls, including those you’ve made, those you’ve answered, and those you’ve missed. iPhone highlights calls you missed in red. For each call, you see who made it and the time at which the caller made it.

4.

Drag your finger up and down the list to scroll it.

3

4

2

50

5.

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

To see only missed calls, press Missed. The list reduces to show only missed calls.

6.

To return a call, press the contact associated with the call.

7.

To get more information about a missed call, press its Info button (if you press the number you’ll call it instead). The Info screen appears. Here you see a variety of information about the call, such as who made it, the time at which the caller placed the call, and contact information for the person making the call if that information resides on your contacts list. The number from which the call came shows in blue. You can dial any number shown by pressing it.

8.

To return to the Recents list, press Recent Calls.

9.

To clear the list, press Clear.

10. Press Clear All Recents. The Recents list is reset.

5 7 6 8

9

10

Managing Calls

51

Adding Caller Information to Favorites 3

Earlier you learned how simple it is to place calls to someone on your favorites list.There are a number of ways to add people to this list, including adding someone who has called you. 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone.

2.

Press Recents. The Recents list appears.

3.

Press the Info button for the person you want to add to your favorites list. The Info screen appears. If the number is associated with a contact, you see that contact’s information.

4.

5.

2

Number is already a favorite.

Press Add to Favorites (you may have to scroll down the screen to see this button). If the person has multiple numbers associated with his contact information, you see each available number. Numbers that are already set as favorites are marked with a blue star. Press the number you want to add as a favorite. You return to the Info screen, and the number is marked with a blue star to show that it is on your favorites list.

6.

Repeat step 5 to add the contact’s other numbers to the favorites list if you want to. If all the numbers are assigned as favorites, the Add to Favorites button disappears.

7.

Press Recent Calls. You can call the favorite by pressing the Favorites button and pressing that favorite on the list.

4

7

52

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Using iPhone’s Headset for Calls iPhone includes a set of earbud headphones with a microphone on one of its cords. The mic includes a button that you can use to do the following: • Answer • End a call

Press the mic button once to answer a call. Press the mic button while you are on a call to end it.

• Decline a call Press and hold the mic button for about two seconds. Two beeps sound when you release the button to let you know that iPhone sent the call to voicemail. • Put a current call on hold and switch to an incoming call and then press again.

Press once

• End a current call on hold and switch to an incoming call Press once and hold for about two seconds. Release the button and you hear two beeps to let you know that you ended the first call. The incoming call is ready for you.

Ringing When you have headphones plugged into iPhone and you receive a call, the ringtone plays on both the iPhone’s speaker and the headphones.

Using Visual Voicemail Visual voicemail just might be the best of iPhone’s many great features. No more wading through long, uninteresting voicemails to get to one in which you are interested. You simply jump to the message you want to hear. And because voicemails are stored on iPhone, you don’t need to log in to hear them. If that isn’t enough for you, you can also jump to any point within a voicemail to hear just that part.

Using Visual Voicemail

>>>step-by-step Recording a Greeting

53

2

The first time you access voicemail, you are prompted to record a voicemail greeting. Follow the onscreen instructions to do so. You can also record a new greeting at any time. 1.

Move to the Phone screen and press Voicemail. The Voicemail screen appears.

2.

Press Greeting. The Greeting screen appears.

3.

To use a default greeting that provides only the iPhone’s phone number, press default.

4.

To record a custom greeting, press Custom. The Record tool appears.

5.

Press Record. The Recording Personal message appears, and recording begins.

1

3

4

5

54

6.

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Speak your greeting. As you record your message, monitor the sound level using the gauge at the bottom of the screen. You should attempt to keep the volume level of your greeting at the midpoint of the gauge.

Missing Password If something happens to the password stored on iPhone for your voicemail, such as if you restore iPhone, you are prompted to enter your password before you can access your voicemail. Do so at the prompt and press OK. iPhone logs you in to voicemail, and you won’t have to enter your password for a second time unless something happens to it again.

7.

When you’re done, press Stop. The Play button becomes active.

8.

Press Play to hear your greeting.

9.

If you aren’t satisfied, repeat steps 5 through 8 to record a new message. You can only replace a recorded greeting; you can’t change it.

10.

When you are happy with your greeting, press Save. iPhone saves the greeting and returns you to the Voicemail screen.

6 7

10

8

Using Visual Voicemail

55

Listening to and Managing Voicemails Unless you turned off the voicemail sound, you hear a tone each time a caller leaves a voicemail for you. In the Voicemail button on the Phone screen, you also see the number of new voicemails you have. (New is defined as those voicemails to which you haven’t listened.)

Number of voicemails to which you haven’t listened

If you receive a voicemail while iPhone is locked, you see a message on the screen alerting you that iPhone received a voicemail. Drag the slider to the right to jump to the Voicemail screen so that you can work with the message.

New voicemail has been left.

56

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

>>>step-by-step

Unheard voicemails

Finding and Listening to Voicemails 1.

5 3

Move to the Phone screen and press Voicemail. You see the Voicemail screen. The list contains each voicemail you’ve received. If iPhone recognizes the person who left the message because the number is on your contacts list, it shows the caller’s name. If the number isn’t recognized, you see the number itself. You also see the time at which the caller left the message. Messages to which you haven’t yet listened are marked with a blue dot.

2.

Browse the list of voicemails.

3.

To listen to a voicemail, press it. It becomes highlighted to let you know that it is the active voicemail message.

4.

Press the message for a message you haven’t listened to before or press the Play button for messages you have heard previously. It begins to play. As it does so, the Playhead moves along the Timeline so that you can see where you are in the message.

5.

To hear the message on iPhone’s speaker, press Speaker.

6.

To pause a message, press its Pause button.

7.

To move to a specific point in a message, drag the Playhead to the point at which you want to listen.

4

2 Timeline Remaining time

1 Elapsed time

6

7

Playhead

Using Visual Voicemail

57

Moving Ahead or Behind You can also drag the Playhead while a message is playing to rewind or fast-forward it.This is also helpful when you want to listen to specific information without hearing the whole message again.

8.

9.

Press the Play button next to the voicemail you want to hear. The message plays from the Playhead’s location.

8

To get more information about a message, press its Info button. The Info screen appears. If the person who left the message is on your contacts list, you see her contact information.

10. To return to the Voicemail screen, press Voicemail.

More than Information Only Much of the information on the Info screen is active, meaning that you can press it to do something. For example, to call a listed number, press it. To send an email, press an email address. To visit a website, press its URL.

10

9

58

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Two Annoyances of Life Solved If you deal with lots of voicemails, iPhone solves two annoyances for you. (Well, they’re annoyances to me anyway.) The first annoyance involves people who speak too quickly or unclearly when they leave information you need, such as a phone number. With regular voicemail, you have to play the whole message just to hear the information you need. With iPhone, you can drag the Playhead to the point in the message containing the information of interest to hear it as many times as you need. The other annoyance is dealing with long voicemails. Because iPhone shows you how long each message is, you can decide to listen to a message based on how long it is. And, of course, you see who each message is from, so you can prioritize messages to listen to as you see fit.

>>>step-by-step Deleting Voicemails 1.

Move to the Voicemail screen.

2.

Press the message you want to delete to select it.

3.

Press Delete. iPhone deletes the message, the Deleted Messages option appears (the first time you delete a message), and the next message on the list plays.

1 2

3

Listening to and Managing Deleted Voicemails 1.

Move to the Voicemail screen.

2.

Scroll down the screen until you see the Deleted Message options.

3.

Press Deleted Messages. The Deleted screen appears.

2

3

Using Visual Voicemail

4.

Listen to any deleted messages just as you do on the Voicemail screen.

5.

To move a message back to the Voicemail screen, select it.

6.

Press Undelete. iPhone restores the message to the Voicemail screen.

7.

To remove all deleted messages permanently, press Clear All.

8.

Press Clear All at the prompt. iPhone erases the deleted messages and returns you to the Deleted screen.

9.

To return to the Voicemail screen, press Voicemail.

59

4 5

6 7

8

What’s Missed In case you’re wondering, iPhone considers any call you didn’t answer as a missed call. So if someone calls and leaves a message, that call is included in the counts of both missed calls and new voicemails.

1

Returning Calls 1.

Move to the Voicemail screen.

2.

Press the message for which you want to return a call.

3.

Press Call Back. The number associated with the message is called.

2

3

60

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Changing Your Voicemail Password 1.

Move to the Settings screen.

2.

Press Phone. The Phone screen appears.

3.

Press Change Voicemail Password. The Password screen appears.

4.

Enter your current password.

5.

Press Done.

6.

Enter the new password.

7.

Press Done. The screen refreshes and prompts you to re-enter the new password.

3

5

4

7

6

Getting Information About Your Cell Account

8.

Re-enter the new password.

9.

Press Done. iPhone saves the new password and returns you to the Phone screen.

61

9

8

Getting Information About Your Cell Account One area in which iPhone is like other cell phones is that you have an account with a service provider—in the United States, this is AT&T. You can use iPhone to get information about your account and to log in to it via the Web.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Phone settings screen.

2.

Scroll down until you see AT&T Services.

3.

Press AT&T Services. The AT&T Services screen appears.

2

3

62

4.

Chapter 1

Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls

Press the action you want to perform, selecting one the following: • Check Bill Balance • Directory Assistance

4

• Pay My Bill • View My Minutes • Voice Connect 5.

Respond to the message that appears on the screen. The particular result depends on the action you select. For example, if you select View My Minutes, you see a note explaining that a message will be sent to your phone. Press Dismiss to clear the message.

6.

Read any messages you receive as the result of the action you selected by pressing them when they appear on the screen.

5

6

Getting Information About Your Cell Account

7.

Back on the AT&T Services screen, press AT&T MyAccount. You move to Safari, and then AT&T’s website opens.

8.

Use the website to access your account information. Chapter 6, “Surfing the Web,” covers using Safari on iPhone.

63

7

8

Use Settings to configure how contacts are displayed.

Press here to manage contact information.

In this chapter, you’ll learn how to make sure that your iPhone has the contact information you need when you need it. Topics include the following: B B B B

Configuring how contacts are displayed Getting contact information onto iPhone Using contacts on iPhone Changing or deleting contacts

2

Managing Contacts Contact information, including names, phone numbers, email addresses, and physical addresses, is vital to getting the most out of iPhone. Because much of iPhone’s functionality revolves around interacting with people and organizations, having the information you need for these interactions is critical. Fortunately, you probably have most of the contact information you need already stored on your computer, and you can easily move that information to iPhone (especially if you use MobileMe). You can also create contacts on iPhone manually and add or refine contact information as you use iPhone.

Configuring How Contacts Are Displayed Before you start using contacts, make sure that contact information displays according to your preferences.

66

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

2.

Scroll down until you see Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

3.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. The Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen appears.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Contacts section.

5.

Press Sort Order. The Sort Order screen appears.

6.

To have contacts sorted by first name and then last name, press First, Last.

7.

To have contacts sorted by last name and then first name, press Last, First.

8.

Press Mail…, Contacts, Calendars.

9.

Press Display Order. The Display Order screen appears.

10. To show contacts in the format first name, last name, press First, Last. 11. To show contacts in the format last name, first name, press Last, First.

2 3

5

8 6 7

9

12. Press Mail…, Contacts, Calendars.

12 10 11

4

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

67

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone To be able to use contact information on iPhone, it has to exist there. Fortunately, there are many ways to configure contact information on iPhone.

>>>step-by-step Moving Contacts from MobileMe or Exchange Accounts to iPhone If you have a MobileMe account that syncs with a computer that contains contact information or you have an Exchange account, you can sync that information on iPhone and vice versa. (To learn how to configure a computer to sync contact information via MobileMe, see the Prologue. To learn how to configure an Exchange account on iPhone, see Chapter 5,“Emailing.”) 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

2.

Scroll down until you see Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

3.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. The Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen appears. You see all the email and other related accounts configured on iPhone.

4.

Press the account from which you want to move contact information onto iPhone. You see that account’s configuration screen.

2 3

4

68

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

5.

Ensure the status of Contacts is ON; if it isn’t, press OFF so that it becomes ON. The contact information associated with that account can now be moved onto iPhone either via MobileMe or Exchange.

6.

Press Mail…, Contacts, Calendars. You return to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen. Under the account, you see Contacts, indicating that contact information is being moved from that account onto iPhone.

6

5

Contact Duplicates If you include contacts from multiple accounts, such as a MobileMe and an Exchange account, you can wind up with lots of duplicate contacts because the accounts become synced with each other over time, and the same contacts are moved onto iPhone from each account. In general, it’s better to sync with only one of these types of accounts and use that as the master contact account on your computers.

Contacts are being synced with this account.

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

69

Moving Contacts from a Windows PC to iPhone If you use Outlook, Windows Address Book/Outlook Express, or Yahoo! Address Book, you can move your contact information from any of those applications onto iPhone. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer.

2.

Click iPhone on the Source list.

3.

Click the Info tab.

4.

Check Sync contacts from.

5.

On the pop-up menu, choose the application you use to manage contact information, such as Outlook.

6.

To sync all contact information, click All contacts and skip to step 9.

7.

If you organize your contact information in groups and want to move only specific ones onto iPhone, click Selected groups.

8.

Check the check box next to each group you want to move onto iPhone.

9.

Click Apply. The contact information you selected moves onto iPhone. Each time you sync iPhone, any changes you make to the selected contact information on the PC move onto iPhone, and changes you make on iPhone move onto the PC.

4

2

6

3

5

7

8

70

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

Moving Contacts from a Mac to iPhone If you use Address Book or Yahoo! Address Book, you can move your contact information from either of those applications onto iPhone. 1.

Connect iPhone to your Mac.

2.

Click iPhone on the Source list.

3.

Click the Info tab.

4.

To sync with Address Book, check Sync Address Book contacts.

5.

To sync all contact information, click All contacts and skip to step 9.

6.

If you organize your contact information in groups and want to move only specific ones onto iPhone, click Selected groups.

7.

Check the check box next to each group you want to move into iPhone and skip to step 9.

8.

To sync with Yahoo! Address Book, check Sync Yahoo! Address Book contacts and follow the onscreen prompts to log into your Yahoo! Address Book.

9.

Click Apply. The contact information you selected moves onto iPhone. Each time you sync iPhone, any changes you make to the selected contact information on the Mac move onto iPhone, and changes you make on iPhone move onto the Mac.

5

2

4

7

3

8

6

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

71

Syncing with More than One Source If you configured iPhone to sync with more than one source of contact information, perhaps Outlook on a Windows PC and Address Book on a Mac, when you sync, you’re prompted to replace or merge the information. If you select Replace Info, the existing information in whatever you are syncing with replaces all the contact information on iPhone. If you choose Merge Info, the information you are syncing moves onto iPhone and merges with the existing contact information.

Importing SIM Contacts iPhone stores various information on its SIM card. This information can include contact information. If you move a SIM card to a different phone, you can import the contact information it contains by moving to the Mail, Contacts, Calendar settings screen and pressing Import SIM Contacts.

Creating New Contacts While Using iPhone As you use iPhone, you encounter many types of contact information. When you receive phone calls (Chapter 1,“Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls”), you deal with phone numbers. When you send emails (Chapter 5), you interact with email addresses. If you text message, you use phone numbers (Chapter 7,“Text Messaging”). When you use the Map application (see Chapter 10,“Working with iPhone Applications”), you view physical addresses. These are just examples of some of the places in which you encounter information you might want to use to create a contact. The steps you use to create contacts during any of these activities is similar, as several of the following examples demonstrate.

>>>step-by-step Creating a Contact from a Recent Phone Call You can capture a phone number associated with a recent call as part of a contact. 1.

On the Home screen, press Phone. The Phone screen appears.

1

72

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

2.

Press Recents.

3.

Press All to see all recent calls or Missed to see only those calls you didn’t answer.

4.

Press the Info button for the number from which you want to create a contact. The Info screen appears; the label on the screen depends on the kind of call you select. For example, if you select a missed call, the screen label is Missed Call.

5.

6.

To add the number to an existing contact, press Add to Existing Contact, and the All Contacts screen appears; skip to step 7. Or, to create a new contact, press Create New Contact. The New Contact screen appears. iPhone adds the number you selected and labels it, such as mobile.

3

4

2

Use the New Contact screen to configure the new contact. This works just like when you create a new contact manually, except that you already have some information (in this example, a phone number) for the new contact. See Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually later in this chapter for details. Skip the rest of these steps.

7.

Browse the screen or use the index to find the contact with which you want to associate the phone number.

8.

Press the contact. You see the Add Phone screen with the information that you’re adding, in this example, a phone number.

5

8

7

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

9.

73

Press the Label field, which is mobile by default. You see the Label screen.

10. Press the label for the new information. 11. Press Add Phone. You return to the Add Phone screen.

9

12. Press Save. You see the contact’s Info screen, which now contains the phone number you added.

11 10

12

74

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

Creating a Contact from an Email When you receive an email, you can easily create a contact to capture the email address. 1.

On the Home screen, press Mail. The Mail screen appears.

2.

Use the Mail application to get to an email (see Chapter 5 for details).

3.

Press the email address from which you want to create a new contact. The Info screen appears; the label of the screen depends on the type of email address you pressed. For example, if you pressed the address from which the email was sent, the screen is labeled From.

4.

1

3 2

Press Create New Contact. The New Contact screen appears. iPhone adds the email address you selected to the new contact, labeled with iPhone’s best guess, such as Home.

4

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

5.

Use the New Contact screen to configure the new contact. This works just like when you create a new contact manually, except that you already have information for the new contact, in this case an email address. See Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually later in this chapter for details.

75

5

Creating a Contact from a Text Message Conversation Like other areas, you can use information from a text message to create a contact. 1.

On the Home screen, press Text. The Text Messages screen appears.

2.

Move to a text conversation (see Chapter 7 for details).

3.

Scroll to the top of the conversation screen.

4.

Press Add to Contacts.

1

2 4 3

76

5.

6.

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

Press Create New Contact. The New Contact screen appears. iPhone adds the number you selected and labels it, such as mobile. Use the New Contact screen to configure the new contact. This works just like when you create a new contact manually, except you already have information for the new contact. See Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually later in this chapter for details.

5

6

Creating a Contact from a Map When you view a location on a map, you can create a contact with that location’s information. 1.

On the Home screen, press Maps. The Map screen appears.

1

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

2.

Use the map to find a location (Chapter 10 covers the Map application).

3.

Press the Info button for the location. The Info screen appears.

4.

Scroll down the screen until you see the Create New Contact button.

5.

Press Create New Contact. The New Contact screen appears. iPhone adds as much information as it can based on the location, such as name, phone number, address, website, and so on.

6.

Use the New Contact screen to configure the new contact.This works just like when you create a new contact manually, except that you already have information for the new contact. See Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually, next, for details.

77

2

3

4

5

6

78

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually Most of the time, you’ll manage contact information on a computer and move it to iPhone. Or you’ll use information on iPhone to create new contacts so that you don’t have to start from scratch. When you do have to start from scratch, you can create contacts manually and add all the information you need to them. 1.

2.

1

On the Home screen, press Contacts. (If you don’t see the Contacts button, drag your finger to the left on the Home screen to move to the next page.) You see the All Contacts screen. Press Add. The New Contact screen appears. You see many of the data elements you can include for a contact, such as name, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and so on. You can add more fields as needed.

3.

To associate a photo with the contact, press Add Photo. The photo dialog appears.

4.

To take a photo of the contact, press Take Photo, and skip to step 8.

5.

To choose an existing photo stored on iPhone, press Choose Existing Photo. The Photo Albums screen appears.

2

3

4 5

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

6.

Use the Photo Album tools to move to, select, and configure the photo you want to associate with the contact. Chapter 9,“Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos,” covers the details of these steps.

7.

Press Set Photo. iPhone configures the photo and saves it to the contact. You return to the New Contact screen and see the photo you selected. Skip to step 11.

8.

Use the iPhone camera to capture the photo you want to associate with the contact.

9.

Use the Move and Scale screen to configure the photo (Chapter 9 explains how to use this screen).

79

6

7

10. Press Set Photo. iPhone saves the photo, and you return to the New Contact screen.

Company Contact If you’re creating a contact for a company or other organization, leave the first and last fields empty. If you don’t want to associate a contact with an organization, leave the company field empty.

8

9

10

80

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

11. Press Last First or First Last (the label you see depends on the preference you set). The Edit Name screen appears.

11

12. Enter the first name. 13. Enter the last name. 14. Enter the company for the contact, if applicable. 15. Press Save. You return to the New Contact screen and see the information you entered. 16. Press Add new Phone. The Edit Phone screen appears.

15 12 13 14

16

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

17.

Enter the phone number, including area code.

18.

Press the Label bar. The Label screen appears.

19.

Press the label you want to associate with the phone number. You return to the Edit Phone screen, and iPhone displays the label you selected.

20.

Press Save. You return to the New Contact screen and see the number and label you entered.

81

17 18

19

20

82

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

21. To add another number, press Add new Phone and repeat steps 17 through 20. 22. To assign a specific ringtone to play when you receive a call from the contact, press Ringtone. The Ringtones screen appears. 23. Press the ringtone you want to associate with the contact. It plays, and iPhone marks it with a check mark to show you that this is the associated ringtone.

21 22

24. Press New Contact.

Custom Labels You can create custom labels for various kinds of contact information. On the Label screen, scroll down the screen and press the Add Custom Label option. The Custom Label screen appears. Create the label and press Save. You can then choose your custom label for the new contact you are creating as well as for contacts you create or change in the future.

25.

24

23

Press Add new Email. The Edit Email screen appears.

25

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

26.

Enter the email address for the contact.

27.

Press the Label bar. The Label screen appears.

26

28.

Press the label you want to associate with the email address. You return to the Edit Email screen.

27

29.

Press Save.

30.

To add another email, press Add new Email and repeat steps 26 through 29.

31.

To associate a website with the contact, press Add new URL. The Edit URL screen appears.

83

28

29

30 31

84

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

32. Enter the URL. 33. Press the Label bar. The Label screen appears. 34. Press the label you want to associate with the URL. You return to the Edit URL screen.

32 33

35. Press Save. 36. To add another URL, press the Add new URL button and repeat steps 32 through 35. 37. Scroll down the screen. 38. To add a new physical address to the contact, press Add new Address. The Edit Address screen appears.

34

35

36 38

37

Getting Contact Information onto iPhone

39.

If the address is not in the default country shown, such as the United States, press the Country button. The Country screen appears.

40.

Scroll the screen to find the country for the address you are creating.

41.

Press the country for the address. You return to the Edit Address screen. The data for the address depends on the country you selected. For example, if the country uses state information, you see a State field. If it uses postal codes, you see the Postal Code field.

42.

Press the first element of the address, such as Street.

43.

Enter the information for that element.

44.

Repeat steps 42 and 43 until you’ve entered all the address’s information.

45.

Press the Label bar. The Label screen appears.

85

39

40

41

42 43

44 45

86

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

46. Press the label you want to apply to the address.

46

47. Press Save. 48. To add another address, press Add new Address and repeat steps 39 through 47. 49. To add more fields to the contact, press Add Field. The Add Field screen appears. On this list, you see all possible data that you can add to a contact.

47

50. Scroll the screen to see the types of data you can add to contacts. 51. Press the data you want to add. The related Edit field appears. For example, if you select Nickname, the Edit Nickname field appears.

48 49

More on More Fields When you add more fields to contact information, those fields appear in the appropriate context on the Info screen. For example, if you add a nickname, it is placed at the top of the screen with the other “name” information. If you add an address, it appears with the other address information.

50

51

Using Contacts on iPhone

52. Use the Edit screen to enter information for the field you selected. The tools on the Edit screen depend on the kind of information you added.

87

53

52

53. Press Save. 54. To add more fields to the contact, press Add Field and repeat steps 50 through 53. 55. When you finish adding information, press Save. The new contact is created and is ready for you to use, and you see the information you entered on the Info screen. It also is included in the next sync so that it will be added to your contact information on your computer.

55

54

Using Contacts on iPhone There are many ways to use contact information. The first step is always finding the contact information you need. Next is selecting the action you want to perform.

88

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press Contacts. (If you don’t see the Contacts button, drag your finger to the left on the Home screen to move to the next page.) You see the All Contacts screen with the contacts listed in the format you selected, such as last name, first name.

2.

Drag your finger up or down to scroll the screen to browse for contact information; flick your finger up or down to scroll rapidly.

3.

Press the index to jump to contact information organized by first letter of the selected format.

4.

To view a contact’s information, press the contact. The Info screen appears.

1

4 2

3

Changing or Deleting Contacts

5.

Scroll up and down the screen to view all the contact’s information.

6.

Press the data and buttons on the screen to perform actions, including the following:

•

Phone Numbers Press a phone number to dial it.

•

Email Addresses Press an email address to create a new email to it.

•

URLs Press a URL to open Safari and move to that website.

•

Addresses Press an address to show it in the Map application.

•

Text Message Press the Text Message button to send a text message.

•

Add to Favorites Press the Add to Favorites button to add the contact information to your Favorites list. When you choose a number, iPhone adds it to your Favorites list and marks it with a blue star to show you that it added the number to the list.

7.

89

7 5 6

To return to the All Contacts list, press All Contacts.

Changing or Deleting Contacts Contact information changes as time passes. For example, perhaps you need to add more information to existing contacts, or you don’t need contact information anymore. In cases like these, you can make these changes or remove those contacts from iPhone.

90

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

When you sync contacts with a computer, the changes go both ways. For example, when you change a contact on iPhone, the synced contact manager application, such as Outlook, makes the changes for those contacts. Likewise, when you change contact information in a contact manager, those changes move to iPhone when you sync it. If you add a new contact in a contact manager, it moves to iPhone during a sync operation and vice versa. When you sync, you see a dialog box that prompts you to tell iTunes how to handle the changes made on the computer with which you are syncing.

>>>step-by-step Changing Contacts via Syncs Using syncing, when you change contact information in one location, it is changed in the other locations the next time you sync. 1.

Connect iPhone to the computer or allow syncs to happen via MobileMe.

2.

Start the sync if iTunes or MobileMe isn’t configured to start it automatically. iTunes identifies changes, and you see the Sync Alert prompt. (This depends on the options you’ve selected in the MobileMe and iTunes sync configuration areas; if you disabled this alert or set the % of information that must change before you see an alert to a high value, you might not be prompted when changes are made.)

Changing or Deleting Contacts

91

How many contacts will be added 3.

To view details, click what you want to see details about, such as Add to see contacts that will be added, Modify to see which contacts will be changed, or Delete to see which contacts will be deleted.

4.

To see the details of the contact that will be added, changed, or deleted, click it. Its details appear.

5.

After you review the changes, click Allow to allow the sync to proceed or click Cancel Sync if you don’t want to make the changes. If you allow the changes, the contact information in the synced contact manager changes accordingly. If you cancel the sync, iTunes prompts you again the next time you sync. If you don’t want the changes ever to be made, you have to undo them on iPhone.

How many contacts will be changed

3

How many contacts will be deleted

4

5

Adding or Removing Information for an Existing Contact Manually You can change any information for an existing contact on iPhone; when you sync, the changes you make are moved into your contact manager, such as Outlook or Address Book. 1.

View the contact’s Info screen.

2.

Press Edit. The Info screen moves into Edit mode, and you see Unlock and Add buttons.

1 2

92

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

3.

Press a field to change its information. The related Edit screen appears, and you can make or save your changes. These Edit screens work just like when you create a new contact (see Creating Contacts on iPhone Manually earlier in this chapter).

4.

To add more fields, press the related Add button. These also work just like when you are creating a contact manually.

5.

8 7 3

To remove a field from the contact, press its Unlock button. The Delete button appears.

5

6.

Press Delete. iPhone removes the field from the contact.

4

7.

To change the contact’s photo, press the current photo, and use the resulting tools to select a new photo, take a new photo, or change the scale of the existing one.

8.

When you finish making changes, press Done. iPhone saves the changes, and you return to the Info screen.

6

Changing or Deleting Contacts

93

Adding Information to an Existing Contact While Using iPhone As you use iPhone, you’ll encounter information related to a contact but that isn’t part of that contact’s information. For example, a contact might call you on a different phone than the one you entered in that contact’s information. When that happens, you can easily add the additional information to an existing contact. 1.

Locate the information you want to add to an existing contact, such as a phone number, email address, or website.

2.

Press the Info button. The Info screen appears.

3.

Press Add to Existing Contact. The All Contacts screen appears.

4.

Locate and press the contact to which you want to add the information. The related Add screen appears depending on the type of information you selected. For example, if you are working with a phone number, the Add Phone screen appears. If you are working with an email address, the Add Email screen appears.

1

2

3

4

94

Chapter 2

Managing Contacts

Even Easier In some cases, you don’t need to use the Info screen, such as when you are viewing a text message. In those cases, just click the Add to Contact button and choose Add to Existing Contact in the resulting dialog.

5.

Use the Add screen to make changes to the information if needed, such as labeling it. This works just like the Edit screen when you add information for a new contact.

6.

Press Save. iPhone adds the information to the existing contact, and you return to wherever you came from, such as an email or text message.

Searching for Contacts When you want to find a specific contact, you can use the Contacts Search tool. Open the All Contacts screen and scroll to the top until you see the Search bar. Type information about the contact you are interested in; as you type, iPhone presents the contacts that meet your criterion on a list. To view a contact, press it on the Results list.

5

6

Changing or Deleting Contacts

95

1

Deleting Contacts Manually

2

To get rid of contacts, you can delete them from iPhone. 1.

Find and view the contact you want to delete.

2.

Press Edit.

3.

Scroll to the bottom of the Info screen.

4.

Press Delete Contact.

5.

Press Delete Contact. iPhone deletes the contact, and you return to the All Contacts list. The next time you sync, iPhone prompts you to approve the deletion on the computer’s contact manager, just like other changes you make (again, depending on the level of change that you’ve set to trigger these notifications).

3

4

5

Press to configure iPod functions.

Press to transform iPhone into an iPod.

In this chapter, you’ll explore all the iPod functionality that iPhone has to offer. The topics include the following: B Stocking iPhone with Audio and Video Using iTunes B Stocking iPhone with Audio and Video from the iTunes Store Application

B B B B

Listening to Music Finding and Listening to Podcasts

3

Finding and Watching Video Customizing iPhone for iPod

Listening to Audio and Watching Video One of the best things about iPhone is that it is a fully featured iPod that you can use to listen to music, podcasts, audiobooks, and other audio. You can also watch movies, TV shows, and other video on iPhone’s high-resolution screen. iPhone has an awesome iPod interface that makes working with audio and video easy and fun.

98

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone Before you can listen to audio and watch video, you have to move content onto iPhone. One way to do this is to add content to your iTunes Library and then move that content from iTunes to iPhone. The most common ways to add content to the iTunes Library are by importing audio CDs or purchasing content from, renting movies from, and subscribing to podcasts in the iTunes Store. After you have stocked your iTunes Library, you can create playlists to organize content. When your content is ready, sync iPhone with the iTunes Library so that the content you want to be available is moved from the Library onto iPhone.

>>>step-by-step Importing Audio CDs to the iTunes Library Importing audio CDs is one of the most useful ways to get music and other audio content into iTunes. 1.

Launch iTunes by double-clicking its application icon, choosing it on the Windows Start menu, or clicking it on the Mac’s Dock.

Only the First Time You need to only perform steps 2 through 10 before the first time you import CDs or when you want to change settings.

2.

Choose Edit, Preferences (Windows) or iTunes, Preferences (Mac). The Preferences dialog appears.

1

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

3 3.

Click the General tab.

4.

On the When you insert a CD drop-down list, choose Import CD and Eject.

5.

Click Import Settings.

6.

On the Import Using drop-down list, choose AAC Encoder.

7.

On the Setting drop-down list, choose Higher Quality.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Check the Automatically retrieve CD track names from Internet check box.

99

4

5

9

10

10. Click OK.

6

7

8

11. Insert a CD into the computer. iTunes connects to the Internet and identifies the CD. When that’s done, the import process starts. You don’t have to do anything else because iTunes manages the import process for you. When the process finishes, iTunes plays an alert sound and ejects the disc. 12. Insert the next CD you want to import. After it has been ejected, insert the next CD and so on until you’ve added all the CDs you want to the iTunes Library.

Imported songs

11

Information about import process

Song being imported

>>> Go Further

100

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

TAGGING YOUR MUSIC To be able to browse and find music in your iTunes Library, you must tag (label) the tracks you import. When iTunes finds a CD’s information on the Internet, it takes care of this for you, including the album artwork associated with that CD (as long as the music is available in the iTunes Store). If iTunes doesn’t find information for CD content you import, you should add tags manually. Do this by selecting a track and choosing File, Get Info. Use the Info dialog to update the track’s tags, including name, album, artist, and even artwork. If you select multiple tracks before you open the Info dialog, you can update the tags on the selected tracks at the same time.

>>>step-by-step Purchasing Audio and Video from the iTunes Store The iTunes Store has a very large selection of music, movies, TV shows, and other content that you can preview, purchase, and download. To do this, you must have an Apple Store account, also known as an Apple ID (you can preview content without an Apple ID). If you have an AIM/AOL screen name, you can use that as an Apple ID (you have to provide credit card information to be able to use that account to make purchases in the iTunes Store). 1.

Click iTunes Store on the Source list. iTunes connects to the iTunes Store, and you see the Home page.

1

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

2.

101

Click Sign In. The Sign In dialog appears.

2

Already Logged In? If your Apple ID appears instead of the Sign In button, you are already signed in to your iTunes account and can skip to step 6.

3.

Enter your Apple ID.

4.

Enter your password.

5.

Click Sign In. You return to the iTunes Store Home page; your Apple ID appears in place of the Sign In button to show that you are signed in to your account.

6.

Browse the iTunes Home page using the various scroll arrows, scroll buttons, and links you see. As you move around, you see more details about content you are browsing, down to the individual album.

3

Links

4

5

Scroll arrows

Sign Me Up! If you don’t have an Apple ID or want to create a new one, click Create New Account and follow the onscreen instructions to obtain an Apple ID. Then use your new ID to log in to the iTunes Store.

Album covers

Scroll buttons

102

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

7.

When you want to purchase and download content, click the Buy button. For example, when you are viewing music, this is the Buy Song or Buy Album button. When you are viewing TV shows, it is the Buy Episode or Buy Season button. The content you purchase is downloaded to your computer and added to your iTunes Library.

8.

Click the Purchased playlist on the iTunes Source list to see content you’ve downloaded from the iTunes Store.

Back Home page

>>> Go Further

Forward

7

Current browse path

Content pane

Selected album

BUY NOW OR BUY LATER iTunes enables you to shop with a shopping cart into which all the content you select gets moved. When you are ready to buy, you move to your shopping cart and check out. You can also buy with one click, meaning that you can click the Buy Now button to immediately purchase or download content. A preference setting determines which method you use. To configure your iTunes shopping experience, open the Store pane of the iTunes Preferences dialog. When you use the shopping cart, you see the Add button instead of the Buy button. After you add content to the shopping cart, you select the cart on the iTunes Source list to complete the purchase and download processes.

7

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

>>>step-by-step Renting Movies from the iTunes Store

1

3

103

2

You can also rent movies from the iTunes Store. When you rent a movie, you can watch it as many times as you’d like within a 24-hour period (starting as soon as you play the rented content the first time) within a 30day rental window. After either the 24-hour viewing or 30-day rental period expires (whichever comes first), the rented movie is removed from iTunes (or your iPhone) automatically. To rent a movie, follow these steps. 1.

Move into the iTunes Store and click the Movies link.

2.

Browse for movies in which you might be interested.

3.

Click a movie’s link to see detailed information about it, including the cost to rent it.

4.

To watch the movie’s trailer, click the View Trailer button.

5.

To rent the movie, click the Rent Movie button. The Sign In dialog box appears.

6.

Enter your Apple ID or AOL screen name and password and click Rent. The movie is downloaded to the iTunes Library.

7.

To access movies you’ve rented, click the Rented Movies source. (Be sure not to play a rented movie until you’re sure you will be able to watch all of it within 24 hours because the viewing period starts as soon as you play it.)

5

4

7

104

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

One Place Only Unlike other content you get from the iTunes Store, rented movies can be on only one device at a time. So when you move a rented movie from the iTunes Library onto iPhone, it disappears from the iTunes Library (you can move it back if you choose).

>>>step-by-step Subscribing to Podcasts in the iTunes Store

3

2

Podcasts are radio-like audio or video episodes that you can subscribe and listen to or watch. Even better, most podcasts are free. 1.

Click iTunes Store. The iTunes Store fills the Content pane.

2.

Click Podcasts. The Podcasts Home page appears.

3.

Scroll down until you see the entire Categories section.

4.

Click a category you are interested in, such as Technology.

5.

Click the Browser button. The browser opens.

4

5

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

6.

Click a subcategory in which you are interested.

7.

Use the scrollbar in the Content pane to browse all the podcasts available.

8.

When you find a podcast you are interested in, select it and click the Play button or just double-click it.

9.

When you find a podcast that you would like to try, click its Subscribe button.

10. Click Subscribe. Under the iTunes Store source, you see the Downloads icon that displays the progress of file downloads, including the number of episodes being downloaded. 11.

105

7

6

8

Click the Podcasts source in the Source list. You see all the podcasts to which you’ve subscribed. The number next to the Podcasts source indicates the number of episodes of the podcasts to which you have subscribed but not listened.

10

11

9

106

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Building Audio and Video Playlists One of the best ways to collect content that you want to place on iPhone is to create a playlist and manually place content onto it. 1.

Click the New Playlist button. A new playlist is created with its default name selected for you to change.

2.

Rename the new playlist and press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac).

3.

Select Music on the iTunes Source list.

4.

Browse or search for songs you want to add to the playlist.

2

1

3

4

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

5.

Drag songs from the Content pane onto the playlist you created.

6.

Repeat steps 3–5 until you place in the playlist all the songs that you want it to contain. You can place any combination of songs in a single playlist.

7.

Select the playlist. Its contents appear in the Content pane.

8.

Drag songs up and down the playlist until they are in the order in which you want them to play.

6

5

7

Building Audio and Video Smart Playlists A smart playlist does the same basic thing as a playlist, which is to collect content that you want to listen to or watch and to move onto iPhone. Instead of placing content in a playlist manually, a smart playlist adds content automatically based on criteria you define.

107

8

108

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

1.

Select File, New Smart Playlist. The Smart Playlist dialog box appears.

2.

Select the first tag on which you want the smart playlist to be based in the Tag menu. For example, you can select the Artist, Genre, My Rating, or Year tag, among many others.

3.

Select the operand you want to use on the Operand menu. For example, if you want to match data exactly, select Is. If you want the condition to be looser, select contains.

4.

Type the condition you want to match in the Condition box. The more you type, the more specific the condition is.

5.

To add another condition to the smart playlist, click the Add Condition button. A new, empty condition appears. At the top of the dialog box, the All or Any menu appears.

6.

Select the second tag on which you want the smart playlist to be based in the second condition’s Tag menu.

7.

Select the operand you want to use in the Operand menu.

8.

Type the condition you want to match in the Condition box.

9.

Repeat steps 5–8 to add more conditions to the playlist until you have all the conditions you want to include.

10.

Select from the list next to Match at the top of the dialog if all the conditions must be met for a track to be included in the smart playlist or select if only one of them must be met.

2

6

3

10

9

4

7

5

8

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

109

11. If you want to limit the playlist, check the Limit to check box. 12. Select the parameter by which you want to limit the playlist in the first menu; this menu defaults to items. Your choices include the number of items, the time the playlist will play (in minutes or hours), or the size of the files the playlist contains (in MB or GB). 13. Type the data appropriate for the limit you selected in the Limit to box. For example, if you selected minutes in the menu, type the maximum length of the playlist in minutes in the box.

11

14

14. Select how you want iTunes to choose the songs it includes based on the limit you selected by using the selected by menu. For example, to have iTunes include tracks you’ve added to the Library most recently, select most recently added. 15.

If you want the playlist to include only songs whose check box in the Content pane is checked, check the Match only checked items check box.

16.

If you want the playlist to be dynamic, meaning that iTunes updates its contents over time, check the Live updating check box. If you uncheck this check box, the playlist includes only those songs that meet the playlist’s conditions when you create it.

17.

Click OK. You move to the Source list; the smart playlist is added and selected, and its name is ready for you to edit. Also the songs in your Library that match the criteria in the playlist are added to it, and the current contents of the playlist are shown.

16 15

13

12

17

110

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

18. Type the playlist’s name and press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac).

18

iTunes Is Helpful As you make selections on the Attribute menu and type conditions in the Condition box, iTunes attempts to automatically match what you type to tags in your Library. For example, if your Library includes Elvis music and you use Artist as an attribute, iTunes will enter Elvis Presley in the Condition box for you when you start typing Elvis.

Check Please! Each item in iTunes has a check box. You use this to tell iTunes if you want it to include the item (such as a song or podcast) in whatever you happen to be doing. If you uncheck this box, iTunes ignores the item.

It’s Not All Good The iPhone’s storage capacity has improved over time (when the 3G was released, there were 8GB and 16GB models, which was a significant improvement over the first generation’s 4GB or 8GB models). Although this is impressive for such a small device, it’s not adequate to store all the content in large iTunes libraries, especially when a library includes lots of video. The only way to deal with this limitation is to pick and choose the content you want to be available on the iPhone. This isn’t hard, but it is a bit of a nuisance. Hopefully future iPhone versions will include even more storage capacity, such as the 32GB available on the current generation of iPod Touch. Ideally, iPhone users want to be able to store all of their iTunes content on the iPhone, so more memory is better.

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

>>>step-by-step Moving Content from the iTunes Library onto iPhone To move iTunes content onto iPhone, you need to choose the content you want to move there and then synchronize iPhone. You can set up iPhone so that content is moved automatically or manually. 1.

Connect the iPhone to your computer using its USB cable. iPhone is mounted on your computer and appears in the iTunes Source list.

2.

Click the iPhone icon. The iPhone configuration screen appears.

3.

Click the Summary tab.

4.

Check Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.

5.

To prevent items you’ve unchecked in iTunes so that they don’t play from being moved to iPhone, check Only sync checked songs and videos.

Do It Yourself? If you check the Manually manage music and videos check box, you can plan content on the iPhone by dragging it from the iTunes Content pane onto the iPhone icon on the Source list.

2

3

4

5

111

112

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

6.

Click the Music tab.

7.

Check the Sync music check box.

8.

Select Selected playlists.

9.

Check the check box next to each playlist that you want to move to iPhone.

8

7

9

10

6

10. Check Include music videos if you want music videos in your collection to be on iPhone. 11. Click the Podcasts tab. 12. Check the Sync check box. 13. Choose how many episodes you want to move onto iPhone. For example, to move only episodes to which you haven’t listened, select all unplayed.

12

14. Select Selected podcasts. 15. Check the check box next to each podcast that you want to move to iPhone.

iTunes Library Not So Large? If you have a relatively small amount of content in iTunes, select the All Songs and Playlists option so that iTunes attempts to move all your music onto iPhone. As I mentioned earlier, iPhone has limited storage, so unless you have a library that takes less space than is available on your iPhone, you have to choose the content you want to place on iPhone.

14

15

13

11

Using iTunes to Add Audio and Video Content to iPhone

16.

Click the Video tab. In the Rented Movies section, you see the movies you are currently renting.

17.

Click a movie’s right-facing Move button to move it from the iTunes Library onto iPhone. The movie’s icon moves to the right pane of the window, which indicates it will be moved onto the iPhone during the next sync.

18.

In the On iPhone section, click a movie’s left-facing Move button to move it from iPhone back to the iTunes Library.

19.

Scroll down until you see the TV Shows section.

20.

Check the Sync check box to move TV shows onto iPhone.

21.

Choose the number of episodes that should be moved on the popup menu. One useful option here is all unwatched, which moves all episodes that you haven’t yet watched onto iPhone.

22.

Choose the Selected radio button.

23.

On the pop-up menu, choose playlists to choose content by playlist or TV shows to choose content by TV series.

24.

Check the check box next to each playlist or TV show you want to move to iPhone.

25.

Scroll down until you see the Movies section.

26.

Check the Sync movies check box.

27.

Check the check box next to each movie you want to move to iPhone.

17

113

16

8 21

20

19

24 22 25

26

27

23

114

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

28. Click Apply. iTunes moves the selected content from the Library to iPhone. If there’s enough space on iPhone, then the process continues until all the content has been moved (and you can skip the rest of these steps). If you’ve selected more content than there is room for on iPhone, you see a warning dialog explaining how much content you selected versus how much is available. It also gives you options to remove selected content, such as podcasts. 29. If you want iTunes to remove content, click Yes; if not, click No. If you elected to let iTunes remove content, the content is removed, and the sync is attempted again. If there still isn’t enough space available or you clicked No, you see another dialog box that explains there isn’t enough room on iPhone.

28

29

30. Click OK. The dialog closes.

30

Using the iTunes Store Application to Add Audio and Video to iPhone

31.

Use the information in steps 6–28 to decrease the amount of content you selected and then perform the sync again. When the sync is complete, you see the “iPhone sync is complete” message in the iTunes Information window. At the bottom of the window, you see how iPhone’s memory is being used. Also the Apply button becomes the Sync button; it becomes Apply again whenever you make changes to the content you’ve selected to sync.

115

iPhone’s memory usage

Check First, then Unplug Wait until the “iPhone sync is complete” message appears in the iTunes Information window located at the top of the iTunes window before removing iPhone from the computer. If you remove it during the sync process, some of the content might not be moved onto iPhone correctly.

Using the iTunes Store Application to Add Audio and Video to iPhone You can use the iTunes Store application to download audio content from the iTunes Store directly onto iPhone, where you can play it just like content you’ve moved onto iPhone using iTunes. The next time you sync iPhone, the content you purchase is moved into your iTunes Library so you can enjoy it there, too.

You Need an Internet Connection To be able to use the iTunes Store application on the iPhone, you need to have an Internet connection via a Wi-Fi network. For help connecting iPhone to Wi-Fi networks, see Chapter 4,“Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs.”

116

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

>>>step-by-step Downloading Audio Content from iPhone’s iTunes Store Application To add audio content from the iTunes Store directly onto the iPhone, you use the iTunes application. 1.

Move to the iPhone’s Home screen.

2.

Press the iTunes button. You move to the iTunes Store application. At the bottom of the screen, you choose how you want to look for content by pressing one of the following buttons: Featured shows featured content in the store, Top Tens takes you to various top ten lists, and Search enables you to search for content. The Featured area breaks down content into New Releases, What’s Hot, and Genres tabs. The Top Tens categories show you various top ten lists; you press a list to see its content. The rest of these steps explain how to use the Search tool because using Featured or Top Tens is straightforward; you simply press on content in which you are interested.

3.

2

Press Search. The Search tool appears.

3

Using the iTunes Store Application to Add Audio and Video to iPhone

4

5 4.

Press the Search box. The keyboard appears.

5.

Type search criteria, such as an artist’s name or song title. As you type, content that matches your search appears under the Search box.

6.

When you see something of interest on the results list, press it. For example, press an artist’s name. You see a list of content related to your search.

7.

To explore the contents of an album, press it. At the top of the screen, you see the album’s general information, such as when it was released and how many songs it contains. In the lower part of the window, you see the tracks on that album.

8.

Drag your finger up or down the screen to see the entire list of tracks.

9.

To preview a track, press it. A 30-second preview plays. While it’s playing, the track’s number is replaced by the Stop button, which you can press to stop the preview.

10. To buy an album, press its Buy button, which shows the price of the album. The button becomes the Buy Now button. 11. To buy a song, press its Buy button, which shows the price of the song. The button becomes the Buy Now button.

117

6

7

10 9

8

11

118

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

12. Press the Buy Now button. You see the iTunes Password prompt.

12

Move from Song to Album Press a song twice to move to the album that the song comes from.

13.

Enter the password for your iTunes Store account.

14.

Press OK. You move back to the screen showing the content you are purchasing; an indicator appears over the Downloads button to show you how many tracks are being downloaded to iPhone.

15.

13 14

Download progress

Press Downloads.You move to the Downloads screen where you see the details about the tracks you are purchasing, including the amount of time the downloads will take to finish. When the process is complete, the Downloads screen becomes empty.This indicates that the content you purchased has been added to iPhone and is ready for your listening pleasure.

15

The Next Time You Sync The next time you sync after purchasing content from the iTunes Store on iPhone, that content is moved into your iTunes Library. It is stored in a playlist called Purchased on iPhonename where iPhonename is the name of your iPhone.

Number of downloads

Listening to Music

119

Listening to Music After you move audio content to iPhone, you can enjoy it while on the move. There are two fundamental steps to listening to audio content. First, find the content you want to listen to; from the Cover Flow Browser to artists and genres, iPhone offers many ways to find what you want to hear. Second, after you select what you want to hear, use iPhone’s playback controls to listen to your heart’s content.

>>>step-by-step Using the Cover Flow Browser to Find and Play Music The Cover Flow Browser simulates what it’s like to flip through a stack of CDs; you can quickly peruse your entire music collection to get to the right music for your current mood. 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

2.

Press one of the music buttons, such as Playlists, Artists, or Songs.

1

2

120

3.

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Rotate iPhone in the clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The Cover Flow Browser appears. Each cover represents an album from which you have at least one song stored on iPhone.

5 4.

To browse your tunes, drag a finger to the right to move ahead in the albums or to the left to move back; the faster you drag, the faster the albums scroll. Below each cover, you see the name and artist for the album in focus, which is the one that is “face on” to the screen.

5.

To see the contents of an album, press its cover or press the Info button when it is in focus. The Contents screen appears showing you a list of all the songs on that album. At the top of the screen, you see the album information. Below that, each song is listed along with its playing time.

6.

To scroll up or down the list of songs , drag your finger up or down the screen.

7.

To play a song, press it. The song begins to play. It is marked with a blue arrow, and the Play indicator appears next to the battery icon.

4

7

6

Listening to Music

8.

To pause a song, press the Pause button. The music pauses, and the Play button replaces the Pause button.

9.

To return to the album’s cover, press its title information or press the Info button.

121

10. While you’re listening, you can continue browsing to find more music you want to listen to.

9

8

Turn It Down! (Or Up!) No matter which technique you use to find and play music, you can control the volume using the Volume keys on the left side of iPhone. Press the upper part of the rocker switch to increase volume or the lower part to decrease it. While you are pressing the switch, a volume indicator appears on the screen to show you how you are changing the volume.

11.

Rotate iPhone in the counterclockwise direction to see the Now Playing screen.

10

12

12. Use the Now Playing screen to control the music (covered in detail in the “Playing Music” task later in this section).

122

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Using Playlists to Find Music Accessing the iTunes playlists that you moved to iPhone is simple. 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

2.

Press the Playlists button. The list of all playlists on iPhone appears.

Shuffle Off to Musical Bliss To hear the songs in a playlist in random order, press Shuffle. It always appears at the top of a playlist’s screen.

3.

Slide your finger up and down the list to see all the playlists on iPhone.

4.

Press the playlist that you’d like to explore. The list of songs in that playlist appears on a screen with the title of the playlist at the top.

2

3

4

Listening to Music

5.

Slide your finger up and down the list to see all the songs it contains.

6.

When you find the song you want to listen to, press it. The song begins to play, and the Now Playing screen appears.

7.

Use the Now Playing screen to control the music (covered in detail in the Playing Music section later in this chapter).

8.

Press the Return button to move back to the playlist’s screen.

6

123

5

Play That Funky Music The song currently playing is marked with the Speaker icon on the playlist’s screen.

8

7

124

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Using Artists to Find Music You can always find music on iPhone by artist. 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

2.

Press Artists. The list of all artists whose content is on iPhone appears. Artists are grouped by the first letter of their first name or by group name.

3.

Slide your finger up and down the list to browse all available artists.

4.

To jump to a specific artist, click the letter along the right side of the screen for the artist’s or group’s first name.

5.

Press an artist whose music you’d like to explore. The list of songs by that artist organized by album appears on the Albums screen.

2

3

Shuffle Music To hear the songs on an album in random order, press Shuffle. It always appears at the top of the album’s screen.

5 4

Listening to Music

6.

Slide your finger up and down the screen to see all the albums for that artist.

7.

To see the contents of an album, click it. The list of contents screen appears with the album’s title at the top.

8.

Drag your finger up and down the screen to see all the songs on the selected album.

9.

To move back to the Albums screen, press Albums.

10. To move back to the Artists screen, press Artists.

6

7

9

11. Continue browsing artists, albums, and songs until you find songs you want to hear. 12. When you find the song you want to listen to, press it. The song begins to play, and the Now Playing screen appears.

125

12

8

13. Use the Now Playing screen to control the music (covered in detail in the Playing Music task later in this section). 14. Press the Return button to move back to the Artists screen.

14

What’s the Speaker Mean? The song currently playing is marked with the album screen.

13

126

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Using Genres to Find Music Like the other categories, using Genres to find music is simple. 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

2.

Press More. The More screen appears, showing you all the categories of content on iPhone.

3.

Press Genres. The Genres screen appears, showing you all the genres of music on iPhone.

4.

Slide your finger up and down the list to see all the genres.

5.

Press the genre in which you are interested. That genre’s screen appears, and you see all the artists whose music is in that genre. At the top of the screen is the All Albums option, which shows you all the albums in that genre on iPhone.

3

2

4

5

Listening to Music

6.

Scroll the screen to see all of the artists in the genre.

7.

When you find an artist whose music you want to view, press it. That artist’s screen appears, and you see all the songs by that artist on iPhone, organized by album.

8.

Press an album to see the songs it contains.

9.

Scroll the screen to see all song titles in the album.

7

127

6

10. When you find the song you want to listen to, press it. The song begins to play, and the Now Playing screen appears.

8

10 9

128

11.

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Use the Now Playing screen to control the music (covered in detail in the “Playing Music” task later in this section).

11

Using the More Menu to Find Music The More menu shows you all the content categories on iPhone. You can use this menu to access content when it can’t be found by one of the category buttons at the bottom of the screen. If you read the previous section, you already know how the More menu works. 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

2.

Press More. The More screen appears, showing you all the content categories on iPhone.

3.

Press the category in which you are interested. That category’s screen appears.

4.

Browse the category and drill down into its detail to get to songs you want to hear. Browsing categories is simil to browsing playlists, artists, and genres. In fact, these are just three examples of categories available on the More menu.

3

2

4

Listening to Music

Artist Press to return to the previous screen. Album art for the album from the currently playing song

Press to return to the start of the current track, press and hold to rewind, or press twice to move to previous track. Drag to the right to increase volume or drag to the left to decrease it.

Playing Music As you have seen, the Now Playing screen appears whenever you play music. This screen provides several controls for the music, and you can use them to navigate back to wherever you came from. 1.

Find and play a song or album. The Now Playing screen appears, and you can use its controls.

2.

Press the Track List view button or double-tap the album cover. The Album Cover view is replaced by the Track List view. Here you see the list of all tracks from which the current song comes, even if you aren’t listening to the album itself (such as when you are listening to a playlist). You see the order of tracks on the album along with their names and playing times.

129

Song (in bold)

2 Album

Press to skip to the next track or press and hold to fast forward. Press to pause and then press again to play.

130

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

3.

Drag your finger up and down to scroll through the tracks in the album.

4.

Press a song to play it.

5.

Rate the song playing by pressing one of the dots. Stars fill up to the dot you pressed to give the song a star rating between one and five stars.

6.

Press the Album Cover button. You return to the Album Cover view.

7.

Press the album cover once. The Timeline bar appears. If the song has lyrics associated with it in iTunes, the lyrics are shown on top of the album cover.

8.

To repeat the current album until you stop playing it, press the Pause button, press the Repeat button once. To repeat the album one time, press the Repeat button again. When the album is set to repeat indefinitely, the button is blue. When it is set to repeat once, a small 1 appears on the button.

9.

To move ahead or back in the song, drag the Playhead to the right or left.

10.

To play the songs on the album randomly, press the Shuffle button.

11.

Scroll up and down the screen to read all the lyrics.

12.

Press the album cover again or just wait for a few seconds. The Timeline bar disappears.

13.

Press the Return button. You move back to the screen from which you selected music to play.

6 5 4 3

13

8 7

9

Press to create a Genius playlist

10 11

12

Listening to Music

14. Press the Now Playing button. You return to the Now Playing screen.

131

14

Audiobooks Another excellent iPod function is the capability to listen to audiobooks. You can get these from the iTunes Store, Audible.com, and many other locations. After you add audiobooks to your iTunes Library, you determine whether they are moved to iPhone by using the music-syncing tools. The tools and techniques for listening to audiobooks are similar to listening to music.

Viewing Albums As soon as you play a song from the Track List view screen, you jump to Album mode. From that point on, you are working with the album from which the current song came only. For example, if you play a playlist, switch to Track List view and play a different song on the same album. You change the content to only that album, so the next song that plays is the next one on the album, not the next one in the playlist. When you press the Return button, you move to the album’s screen instead of the playlist’s screen. If you view only the song’s information or give it a rating in Track List view, when you move back to the Cover view, you are still working with the original source, such as a playlist.

132

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Controlling Audio Content with the iPod Control Bar Because you can do so much more on iPhone than just listen to music, you’ll often be doing something else, such as browsing the Web while music is playing. It would be a nuisance to have to move back into the iPod functions to perform basic actions, such as pausing music. Fortunately, with the iPod control bar, you don’t have to.

>>>step-by-step Configure the iPod Control Bar First, configure how you want to activate the control bar. 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings. You see the Settings screen.

2.

Scroll down until you see the General option.

3.

Press General.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Home Button option.

5.

Press Home Button.

6.

If you want to move to the iPod functions when you press the Home button twice, press iPod. If you want to move to Phone Favorites or Home instead, press those options.

7.

To make the iPod control bar active when music is playing, ensure ON shows next to iPod Controls; if not, press to the left of the OFF button, which turns the function on.

2 3

4

5

6 7

Controlling Audio Content with the iPod Control Bar

133

Use the iPod Control Bar Use the control bar to do the following tasks. 1.

Play music.

2.

Move away from the iPod screens, such as by moving back to the Home screen and then opening the Web browser.

3.

Press the Home button twice. The screen you were using fades into the background, and the iPod control bar appears.

4.

Use the controls on the bar to control music.

5.

When you’re done, press Close. The control bar closes, and you move back to whatever you were doing.

Artist Press to return to the start of the current track, press and hold to rewind, or press twice to move to the previous track. Press to pause and then press again to play.

5

Song (in bold)

Album Press to skip to the next track or press and hold to fast forward. Press to move to the iPod module.

Drag to the right to increase volume or drag to the left to decrease it.

134

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Finding and Listening to Podcasts iPhone is a great way to listen to your podcasts. Like all other iPod functions, you first find the podcast you want to listen to and then use iPhone’s audio playback controls to hear it.

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

2.

Press the More button. The More screen appears, showing you all the content categories on iPhone.

3.

Press Podcasts. The Podcasts screen appears, showing you the podcasts to which you are subscribed and that have been moved onto iPhone.

2

3

Finding and Listening to Podcasts

4.

Press the podcast to which you want to listen. The list of episodes for that podcast is shown; the name of the list screen is the name of the podcast. Podcasts to which you haven’t listened are marked with a blue dot.

5.

Press the episode you want to hear. The podcast begins to play, and the Now Playing screen appears.

6.

To control the podcast, use the controls on the Now Playing screen, which work just as they do when you are playing music. (See the previous section for details.)

135

4

5

6

136

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Finding and Watching Video iPhone is a great way to enjoy video content as well, such as movies or TV shows, while you’re on the move. Like music and other content, the first step is to find the video you want to watch. Then you use iPhone’s video tools to watch that video.

>>>step-by-step Finding Video Finding video content on iPhone is similar to finding the other kinds of content we’ve already discussed. 1.

On the Home screen, press the iPod button.

Going Back Again When content is playing and you press the iPod button, you move to the Now Playing screen. To get back to the iPod screen, press the Return button until the iPod buttons appear at the bottom of the screen.

1

3

2.

Press Videos. The Videos screen appears, showing you the video content on iPhone.

3.

Scroll the screen to see all the video content, which is organized by type, such as Movies, TV Shows, and Music Videos. Content you haven’t watched yet is marked with a blue dot.

4

To watch a movie, an episode of a TV series, or a music video, press it and rotate the iPhone clockwise or counter-clockwise. The screen rotates, and the content begins to play.

2

4.

Finding and Watching Video

5.

Watch and control the video; see the next section for details of controlling video.

Series, Series

5

In some cases, episodes of a TV show might be listed by seasons of a series instead of listing each episode. In that case, select the season containing the episode you want to watch. You see the episodes that season contains. Press the episode you want to watch.

Watching Video When you play video, it is always oriented in landscape mode so that it can fill the screen. 1.

Press the video you are watching. The video controls appear.

Scale This If native scale of the video is not the same proportion as the iPhone screen and you play it in its original scale, the video might not fill the screen. When you scale the video, it fills the screen, but some content might be cut off.

1

137

138

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

2.

Drag the playhead to the right to move ahead or to the left to move backward.

3.

Press the Scale button to scale the video to fit the screen or to show it in its native scale. After a few seconds, the video controls disappear.

4.

When you’re done watching, press Done. You move back to the Videos screen.

Remember Where You Were? For most kinds of video, iPhone remembers where you left off. So if you stop a movie somewhere in the middle, when you restart it, iPhone will start you at that same point.

4

Elapsed time

2

Pause/ Press to Play move to the start or Drag to the press and right to hold to increase rewind. volume or drag to the left to decrease it.

Remaining 3 time

Press and hold to fast forward.

Deleting Video Because it takes up a lot of space, video is the only content you can delete from iPhone. 1.

Move to the Videos screen.

2.

Drag left or right on the video you want to delete. The Delete button appears.

1

Gone but Not Forgotten Deleting video from iPhone only removes it from the iPhone. The video content remains in your iTunes Library, even after the next sync. You can add video back to iPhone again by including it in a sync.

2

Customizing iPhone for iPod

3.

Press Delete. A warning prompt appears.

4.

Press Delete again to delete the video or Cancel to keep it.

139

Music Video Without the Video

3

If you want to hear the audio from a video without watching it, choose it from any screen except the Videos screen. Only its audio content plays.

4

Customizing iPhone for iPod You could use iPhone as an iPod just fine without performing any of the steps in this section. However, because this book is named My iPhone, you should explore these options to make iPhone your own.

>>>step-by-step Building and Editing an On-The-Go Playlist You can build a special playlist on iPhone. This is called the On-The-Go playlist because, well, you build it while you are on the go.

Creating and Listening to an On-The-Go Playlist 1.

Move to the Playlists screen.

2.

Press On-The-Go. The Songs screen appears.

1 2

140

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Add from Anywhere While you’re in Playlist-building mode, you can add content from any iPod screen. For example, to add content by artist instead of by song, press the Artists button. The Artists screen appears. Press the artist whose music you want to add to the playlist and add the songs by that artist by pressing those songs or clicking the Add buttons. You can add content by genre, composer, and so on in the same way.

6

4 3

3.

Drag your finger up and down the screen to browse all the songs on iPhone.

4.

To add a song to the playlist, press the song or the Add button. After you add a song, it is grayed out to show it’s already part of the playlist. You can add the same song to the playlist only one time.

5.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you’ve added all the songs that you want the playlist to contain.

6.

Press Done. You move to the OnThe-Go playlist screen and see the songs it contains.

7.

Play the On-The-Go playlist just like playlists you’ve moved from the iTunes Library.

All at Once You can add all the songs shown on any screen by pressing Add All Songs.

7

Customizing iPhone for iPod

Changing an On-The-Go Playlist 1.

Move to the Playlists screen as described in the previous task and press the On-The-Go playlist option. You see the On-The-Go playlist screen.

2.

Press Edit. The screen changes to Edit mode.

1

141

2

Clear It To remove all songs from a playlist, press Clear Playlist and then press Clear Playlist again. The playlist is returned to an empty state.

3.

To add songs, press the Add button; this works just like when you added songs to the playlist originally. (See the previous section for details.)

4.

To change the order in which songs play, press the List button and drag a song to its new position on the playlist.

5.

To remove songs, press the Unlock button. The Delete button appears.

6.

Press Delete. The song is removed from the playlist.

7.

When you’re finished making changes, press Done. You move back to the On-The-Go playlist screen.

3

5 4

7

6

>>> Go Further

142

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

SAVING THE ON-THE-GO PLAYLIST When you sync iPhone, the On-The-Go playlist moves into your iTunes Library where you can work with it just like playlists you create in iTunes. For example, you can change its name, its content, and so on. Each time you change the On-The-Go playlist on iPhone, a new version is created. When you sync, that version moves into iTunes, and its name is updated with a sequential number, as in On-The-Go1, On-The-Go2, and so on. Each version becomes a new playlist in your iTunes Library.

Using the iPhone Genius The Genius features build a playlist based on music you already have. How the Genius selects songs that sound good with other songs is a bit of a secret, but it seems to work pretty well. You can have the Genius build a playlist for you in a couple of ways, and then work with the Genius playlist similar to how you can use the On-the-Go playlist.

>>>step-by-step Creating a Genius Playlist Based on the Current Song 1.

Play a song.

2.

On the Now Playing screen, press the screen so the Timeline and controls appear.

3.

Press the Genius button. iPhone creates the Genius playlist that’s includes 25 songs that sound good with the current song. The music stops playing and you move to the Genius screen where you see the songs that the Genius thinks will sound good with the song you were playing; that song is at the top of the list and is marked with the Genius icon.

3

2

Customizing iPhone for iPod

4.

Press any song on the playlist to start playing it.

5.

Press the New button to start a new Genius playlist (see “Creating a Genius Playlist By Selecting a Song”).

6.

To have the Genius change the playlist, press Refresh. Songs may be added and the order in which they are listed may be changed.

7.

To save the playlist, press Save. The name of the playlist changes from Genius to be the name of the song on which the playlist was based. The New and Refresh buttons disappear, and the Save button becomes Edit to show you that the playlist has been saved. The playlist appears on the Playlists screen like other playlists you have created except it is marked with the Genius icon, and Genius playlists appear near the top of the Playlists screen. You can then play the playlist like the others on the Playlists screen or edit it (covered in the “Refreshing a Genius Playlist” section). It is moved into your iTunes Library the next time you sync iPhone, just as the Onthe-Go playlist is (except its name isn’t changed).

Creating a Genius Playlist By Selecting a Song 1.

Move to the Playlists screen.

2.

Press Genius. You see the Songs screen.

143

7 6

5

4

Song iPhone used to create the playlist

1

2

144

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

3.

Browse for the song on which you want the playlist to be based.

4.

Press the song on which you want the playlist to be based. The Genius creates the playlist and it appears briefly on the Genius screen. It starts to play automatically and you move to the Now Playing screen.

5.

Press the Return button. You move back to the Genius screen.

6.

Use steps 5 through 7 in the previous task to work with the playlist.

Refreshing a Genius Playlist 1.

Move to the Playlists screen.

2.

Press the Genius playlist you want to manage. Its screen appears.

3

4

5

1

2

Genius playlist

Customizing iPhone for iPod

3.

Press Edit. The Refresh prompt appears.

4.

Press Refresh. The Genius builds a new playlist based on the same song. The resulting playlist might have the same or different songs and they might be in a different order. The refreshed playlist replaces the previous version.

145

3

Deleting a Genius Playlist If you press the Edit button immediately after you’ve saved a playlist, the Delete Playlist option appears. Press this to delete the playlist. The option appears only for the most recently created playlist. To delete other Genius playlists, you delete them from the iTunes Library and then sync iPhone.

4

Configuring iPhone’s iPod Toolbar

2

The five buttons at the bottom of the iPod screen enable you to get to specific content quickly. You can choose four of the buttons that appear on the screen to make accessing content by type even easier and faster. 1.

Move to the More screen.

2.

Press Edit. The Configure screen appears.

More, Always More You can’t replace the More button. It always appears on the iPod toolbar.

1

146

3.

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

Drag the button you want to add to the toolbar to the location of one of the buttons currently there. As you get over the current button, it lights up to show you that it will be the one replaced when you lift your finger. The button you dragged replaces the button over which you placed it. The original button is moved onto the Configure screen.

4.

Repeat step 3 until the four buttons you want to be on the toolbar are there. (The fifth button is always the More button.)

5.

Press the Done button located in the upper-right corner of the screen. The iPod toolbar contains the buttons you placed on it along with the More button.

3

5

Configuring iPhone’s iPod Settings There are a few iPod settings you use to configure various aspects of iPhone’s iPod functionality. 1.

Press the Home button to move back to iPhone’s Home.

2.

Press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

2

Customizing iPhone for iPod

147

3.

Scroll down until you see the iPod settings option.

4.

Press iPod. The iPod Settings screen appears.

3

5.

Press Sound Check if you want iPhone to attempt to even the volume of the music you play so that all the songs play at about the same relative volume level. Sound Check’s status is indicated by OFF or ON. When you press the Sound Check button, its status toggles from one to the other.

4

6.

To set the speed at which audiobooks play, press Audiobook Speed. The Audiobook Speed screen appears.

7.

Press the speed at which you want audiobooks to play; the current speed is indicated by the check mark.

8.

Press iPod.

9.

To set an equalizer, press EQ. The EQ screen appears.

5 6

8 7

9

148

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

10. Scroll the screen to see all the equalizers available to you. 11. Select the equalizer you want iPhone to use when you play music; the current equalizer is indicated by the check mark. To turn the equalizer off, select Off.

12 10 11

12. Press iPod. 13. To set a limit to the volume level on iPhone, press Volume Limit. The Volume Limit screen appears. 14. Drag the volume slider to the point that you want the maximum volume level to be. 15. To lock this control so that it can’t be changed without a passcode, press Lock Volume Limit. The Set Code screen appears.

13

16. Press a digit, which becomes the first digit in the code. 17. Press each of the other three digits to create a four-digit code.

14 15

16

17

Customizing iPhone for iPod

149

18. Re-enter the code to confirm it. If the code matches, you return to the Volume Limit screen, and the code is set.

18

Forgot the Code? If you forget the passcode, you can reset or restore iPhone to clear it. See Chapter 12,“ Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems,” to learn how.

19. To make changes to a locked volume limit, press Unlock Volume Limit. 20. Enter the code. The volume limit is unlocked, and you can change it again.

19

20

150

Chapter 3

Listening to Audio and Watching Video

21. Press iPod to move back to the iPod Settings screen.

21

22. Scroll down until you see the Video settings.These settings impact how video plays on iPhone. 23. Press Start Playing. 24. Press Where Left Off to have iPhone remember where you last were watching in a video so it resumes at the same location when you play it again or From Beginning to have iPhone always start at the beginning. 25. Press iPod to move back to the iPod Settings screen. 26. To enable or disable Closed Captioning on video, press the Closed Captioning button. Its status is indicated by ON or OFF. When you press the button, it toggles between the two states.

22

23

25

24

27. Scroll down until you see the TV Out settings. These settings impact how video plays on a TV when it is connected to iPhone. 28. To enable or disable widescreen playback, press the Widescreen button. Its status is indicated by ON or OFF.When you press the button, it toggles between the two states.

26 28

27

29

29. To select a specific output format, press TV Signal. 30. To choose the NTSC format (for U.S. televisions for example), press NTSC or to choose the PAL format (European televisions are some that use this format), press PAL. 31. Press iPod to return to the iPod Settings screen.

31

30

This page intentionally left blank

Go here to connect iPhone to the Internet, Bluetooth devices, and VPN networks.

In this chapter, you’ll explore how to connect iPhone to networks and Bluetooth devices. Topics include the following: B Connecting to the Internet B Connecting to Bluetooth devices B Connecting to VPNs

4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs Even if you’ve read this book in sequential order, you know that iPhone is unlike any other personal digital device. If all it contained were the cell phone and iPod functionality, it would still be amazing. However, iPhone is just getting started. It really begins to shine when you use its Internet functions, such as email, web browsing, maps, weather, and…well, you get the idea. As you can probably guess, to use iPhone’s Internet functions, you have to connect it to the Internet. You might also want to connect iPhone to Bluetooth devices, such as a Bluetooth headset. Or you might want to connect iPhone to a virtual private network (VPN) so that you can use it to access the resources available on that network. This chapter teaches you the techniques for accomplishing all of that and more.

154

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

Connecting to the Internet When it comes to connecting iPhone to the Internet, you have three options. One is to connect via a Wi-Fi broadband connection that is very, very good, and you’ll enjoy the iPhone’s Internet functionality at amazing speeds. When a Wi-Fi network isn’t available, iPhone connects to AT&T’s 3G network, which offers very good performance, and Internet functions are fast enough to be very useful indeed. When the first two options aren’t available, iPhone connects through AT&T’s EDGE network, which is so slow you might not be able to stand it for some functions, such as web browsing; still, there are some situations in which connecting, even at a snail’s pace, is better than no connection at all.

Connecting to the Internet via Wi-Fi Networks You can connect iPhone to a variety of Wi-Fi networks, including those available in your home or business or in public places, such as airports and schools.

Automatic Prompting to Join By default, when you access one of iPhone’s Internet functions, such as Safari, iPhone automatically searches for networks to join if you aren’t already connected to one. A dialog appears showing all the networks available to you. You can select and join one of these networks similar to how you join one via Settings, as you learn how to do in the following steps. If you don’t want iPhone to do this, use the Settings button to move to the Wi-Fi Networks screen and turn off Ask to Join Networks. When it’s off, you need to manually connect to networks each time you want to join as described in the following steps.

>>>step-by-step Connecting to an Open Network Many Wi-Fi networks broadcast their information so that you can easily see them when searching with iPhone; these are called open networks because anyone who is in range can attempt to join them because they appear on Wi-Fi devices. These are the easiest to join.

Connecting to the Internet

Be aware that some open networks charge access fees, especially in public places such as airports; in these situations, you need a username and password to be able to access the Internet over the network. Access the provider’s login page to log in or obtain an account that you use to connect to the Internet. 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings.The Settings screen appears. Next to Wi-Fi, you see the status of your Wi-Fi connection, which is Not Connected if you aren’t currently connected to Wi-Fi.

2.

Press Wi-Fi. The Wi-Fi Networks screen appears.

3.

If Wi-Fi is turned off, press the OFF button to turn it on. Wi-Fi status becomes ON, and iPhone immediately starts searching for available networks.

155

1

2

Typing Passwords As you type a password, each character is hidden by dots in the Password field except for the last character you entered. You always see the most recent character you entered, which can prevent you from getting all the way to the end of a sometimes long password only to discover you’ve made a mistake along the way and have to start all over again.

3

I’m using the 3G nomenclature for iPhone’s high-speed wireless network because that is what AT&T’s network is called in the United States. If you use a different provider, you may have access to a different network. The information in this section still applies with the exception that you may see your network’s name instead of 3G.

156

4.

5.

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

Review the networks that iPhone finds. For each network, you see its name, whether it is secure (the padlock icon indicates you need a password to join the network), and its signal strength (the number of waves next to the More button). I’ve found that the signal strength icon on this screen isn’t very reliable; you won’t really know how strong a signal is until you actually connect to the network. Press the network you want to join. (If you recognize only one of the networks, you’ve probably used it before, so it is a good choice.) You also need to consider the security of the network; if you see the padlock icon next to the network’s name, you need a password to join the network, and you have to do the following two steps. If the network is not marked with the padlock icon, it is not secure, and you can skip to step 8. If you select a network that requires a password, the Enter Password screen appears.

6.

Enter the password for the network.

7.

Press Join. iPhone attempts to connect to the network. If you provided the correct password, iPhone connects to the network and gets the information it needs, such as an IP address. After you connect to the network, you return to the Wi-Fi Networks screen.

Secure network (requires a password) Network name

Signal strength

5 4

Doesn’t require a password

More button

6

7

Connecting to the Internet

8.

9.

157

Connected network

Review the network information. The network to which you are connected is in blue and is marked with a check mark. You see the signal strength for that network (this indication is typically more accurate than the one you see before you are connected).

8 9

Press the More button for the network to which you are connected. You see the Info screen, which is labeled with the name of the network.

10. Scroll the screen to review the network’s information. The most important item is the IP Address. If there is no number here or the number starts with 169, the network is not providing an IP address, and you must find another network. You can safely ignore the rest of the information on the screen in most situations. If you want to access some of the more advanced settings, such as HTTP proxy, you need information from the network administrator to be able to access the network. 11. Press Wi-Fi Networks to return to the Wi-Fi Networks screen.

Was Connected but Now I’m Not If you’ve been using a network successfully, and at some point, iPhone cannot access the Internet but remains connected to the network, move to the network’s Info screen and press Renew Lease. This sometimes refreshes iPhone’s IP address so that you can access the Internet again.

11

10

158

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

Wi-Fi connection 12. Move to the Home screen. You should see the Wi-Fi connection icon next to AT&T, which also indicates the strength of the signal. If you see 3G or EDGE instead, you’re connected to one of those networks, meaning that you didn’t connect to the Wi-Fi network successfully or that you have moved out of that network’s range. In this case, iPhone automatically connects to the next best available network. (“Next best” means a WiFi network if another network is available, followed by the 3G network, and last, the EDGE network.)

12

13

13. Press Safari. Safari opens. 14. Try to move to a web page. (See Chapter 6,“Surfing the Web,” for details.) If you move to a web page that is not from a Wi-Fi provider, you’re good to go and can start relishing your highspeed bliss. If you are taken to a web page for a Wi-Fi provider, you need an account to be able to access the network. If you have a username and password for the network, enter them on the login form. If you don’t have an account, you must obtain one; use the web page to sign up. After you have an account with that provider, you can get to the Internet.

14

Connecting to the Internet

159

Connecting to a Closed Network Some networks don’t broadcast their names or availability; these are called closed networks because they are hidden to people who don’t know they exist. To connect to one of these networks, you must know the network’s name because it won’t show up on the network list. You also need to know the type of security the network uses and its password. You have to get this information from the network’s provider. 1.

Follow steps 1 through 3 in the previous section to turn Wi-Fi on and to move to the Wi-Fi Networks screen.

2.

Press Other. The Other Network screen appears.

3.

Enter the name of the network.

4.

Press Security. The Security screen appears.

2

3 4

160

5.

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

Press the type of security the network uses. The options are None, WEP, WPA, WPA2, WPA Enterprise, or WPA2 Enterprise. You don’t need to worry about what each of these options means; you just need to pick the right one for the network. You’ll need to get the type of security from the person who manages the network. (The None option is for unsecured networks, but it’s unlikely that a hidden network wouldn’t require a password.) When you select an option, it is marked with a check mark.

6.

Press Other Network. You move back to the Security screen. In the Security field, you see the type of security you selected. The Password field appears.

7.

Enter the password.

8.

Press Join. If the information you entered matches what the network requires, you join the network and can begin to access its resources. If not, you see an error message and have to try it again until you are able to join. When you successfully join the network, you move back to the Wi-Fi Networks screen.

6

5

7

8

Connecting to the Internet

9.

Move to the Home screen. You should see the Wi-Fi connection icon next to AT&T, which also indicates the strength of the signal. If you see 3G or EDGE instead, you’re connected to one of those networks, meaning that you didn’t connect to the Wi-Fi network successfully or that you have moved out of that network’s range, in which case, iPhone automatically connects to the next best available network. (“Next best” means a Wi-Fi network if another network is available, followed by the 3G network, and last, the EDGE network.)

161

Wi-Fi connection

9

10

10. Press Safari. Safari opens. 11. Try to move to a web page. (See Chapter 6,“Surfing the Web,” for details.) If you move to a web page that is not from a Wi-Fi provider, you’re good to go and can start relishing your highspeed bliss. If you are taken to a web page for a Wi-Fi provider, you need an account to be able to access the network. If you have a username and password for the network, enter them on the login form. If you don’t have an account, you must obtain one; use the web page to sign up. After you have an account with that provider, you can get to the Internet.

11

162

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

Security Key Index Some private networks require a key index in addition to a password. Unfortunately, there’s no way to enter a specific key on iPhone. If a network requires this key, you can’t connect iPhone to it. You might be able to join the network, but you probably won’t be able to get an IP address from it—and you must have one to get to the Internet. If you are unable to join a Wi-Fi that you know is available, check with the administrator to make sure that you have the right configuration information and don’t need a key index.

Changing Networks You can change the network that iPhone is using at any time. For example, if you lose Internet connectivity on the current network, you can move iPhone onto a different one. 1.

2.

Move to the Settings screen. The network to which iPhone is currently connected is shown. Press Wi-Fi. iPhone scans for available networks and presents them to you in the Choose a Network section of the Wi-Fi Networks screen.

1

2

Current network

Connecting to the Internet

3.

Press the network that you want to join. iPhone attempts to join the network. If you haven’t joined that network previously and it requires a password, enter it when prompted to do so. After iPhone connects, you see the new network’s name highlighted in blue and marked with a check mark.

163

3

Be Known After iPhone connects to a Wi-Fi network (open or closed) successfully, it becomes a known network. iPhone automatically connects to known networks when it needs to access the Internet.

Forgetting Networks As you learned earlier, iPhone remembers networks you have joined and connects to them automatically as needed. Although this is mostly a good thing, occasionally you won’t want to use a particular network any more. 1.

Move to the Wi-Fi Networks screen.

2.

Press the More button for the network that you want iPhone to forget. That network’s Info screen appears.

1

2

164

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

3.

Press Forget this Network.

4.

Press Forget Network in the resulting prompt. iPhone forgets the network, and you return to the Info screen. If iPhone were getting an IP address from the network, that address is cleared, and iPhone attempts to connect to a different network automatically.

5.

3

Press Wi-Fi Networks. You return to the Wi-Fi Networks screen. If a network you’ve forgotten is still available to iPhone, it continues to appear in the Choose a Network list, but iPhone will no longer automatically connect to it. You can rejoin the forgotten network at any time just as you did the first time you connected to it.

4

Networking Complexities In some situations, especially nonpublicly accessible networks within businesses, you won’t be able to use the standard settings, such as DHCP, that you do for most public (and private for that matter) networks. (DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol in case you are wondering.) If you need to access a network via BootP or static addressing, you’ll likely need some help, especially to get the information you need to connect to networks using these methods. After you have that information, you can use the Info screen to enter it as needed.

5

Connecting to the Internet

165

Connecting to the Internet via 3G One of the best things about the iPhone 3G is that it connects to AT&T’s 3G high-speed wireless network so you can get fast Internet access from many locations. (Note: The 3G network is not available in all locations but is available near most major cities.) To connect to the 3G network, you don’t need to do anything. If you aren’t connected to a Wi-Fi network and iPhone isn’t in Airplane mode, iPhone automatically connects to the 3G network if it is available in your current location. When you are connected to the 3G network, you see the 3G indicator at the top of the iPhone screen. 3G network

Whenever you are connected to the 3G network, you can access the Internet for web browsing, email, and so on. While the speed won’t be quite as good as with a Wi-Fi network, it is relatively fast, certainly enough to be very usable. This is probably the biggest area in which the original iPhone falls short of its descendents. The original iPhone can only use Wi-Fi or the very slow EDGE network to connect to the Internet. If you have an original iPhone, you can skip this section because it doesn’t apply to you. If you do use the Internet a lot while you don’t have access to a Wi-Fi network, you may want to upgrade to the current generation of iPhone because the network speed is much better.

166

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

>>>step-by-step Disabling 3G While the 3G network is fast, it does come with a price, which is shorter battery life. If you want to disable access to the 3G network to increase the amount of time between charges, perform the following steps: 1.

Move to the Settings screen.

2.

Press General.

3.

Press Network. The Network screen appears.

4.

Next to Enable 3G, press ON. The status becomes OFF, and iPhone can no longer access the 3G network. It can still access the EDGE network, which is the topic of the next section.

1

2

3

Where’s My 3G? To re-enable the 3G network, move back to the Network screen and press OFF. The status becomes ON, and iPhone can access the Internet quickly via the 3G network.

4

Connecting to the Internet

167

Connecting to the Internet via EDGE When a Wi-Fi or the 3G network isn’t available, you are reduced to using the EDGE network (the original iPhone can only use Wi-Fi or the EDGE). When no better network is available (assuming iPhone isn’t in Airplane mode), iPhone connects to the EDGE network automatically so that you can still use iPhone’s Internet functionality. There’s a reason the EDGE is the last resort; the speed is so slow that you’ll need much more patience than I have to use the Web. The EDGE network can work okay for email and some of the other less data-intensive functions, however. And sometimes an EDGE connection is better than no connection. When iPhone is connected to the EDGE network, the E icon appears at the top of the screen. EDGE network

Connecting to Bluetooth Devices iPhone includes built-in Bluetooth support so that you can use this wireless technology to connect to other Bluetooth-capable devices. The most likely device to connect to iPhone in this way is a Bluetooth headset, but there might be times when you connect other devices to iPhone, too. Connecting any device to iPhone using Bluetooth is similar to the following steps that demonstrate how to connect iPhone to a standard Bluetooth earpiece for hands-free calling.

168

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Settings screen.

2.

Press General. The General screen appears.

3.

Press Bluetooth. The Bluetooth screen appears.

4.

Press OFF. Bluetooth starts up, and the status becomes ON. iPhone immediately begins searching for Bluetooth devices.

5.

Turn on the Bluetooth headset and put it in Discoverable mode (see the instructions provided with the device). The two devices find each other. On iPhone, the headset is listed but shown as not paired.

It Takes Two to Pair In Bluetooth, pairing is the lingo for two Bluetooth devices connecting. This always requires one thing and sometimes requires two. The “always” requirement is that the devices can communicate with each other via Bluetooth. The “sometimes” requirement is a pairing code or PIN. Sometimes you enter this code on both devices, while for other devices, you enter the first device’s code on the second device. Some devices don’t require a PIN at all, in which case you don’t even have to think about it.

1

2

3

4

Connecting to Bluetooth Devices

6.

7.

Press the name of the headset to pair it. The status becomes paired as iPhone starts communicating with the device and you return to the Bluetooth screen. The devices to which iPhone is connected are shown in the Devices list. When iPhone and another device are communicating successfully, the Devices list shows them as paired. Press General. You’re ready to use the Bluetooth headset. When you make a call, iPhone prompts you to use the Bluetooth headset. Press the headset you want to use; if you don’t choose, iPhone uses whichever device is marked with the speaker icon that indicates the default device. (If you don’t see the Bluetooth device, it isn’t paired properly so you need to try to set up iPhone to access it again by following the earlier steps.)

PIN Required? For most Bluetooth headsets, you can pair the headset with iPhone just by pressing the headset on the Bluetooth screen. Some devices require a PIN to be able to pair the device with iPhone. If this is the case, you’ll be prompted to enter the device’s PIN. Do so, and the device will be paired with iPhone.

169

6

Paired device

7

Bluetooth headset is the default.

170

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

Connecting to VPNs Many organizations use a VPN to provide access to a local network from devices outside that network. For example, many businesses enable employees to connect to internal resources from outside their local networks so that those employees can have access to the same resources they do when they are “on the inside.”You can connect to VPNs on iPhone as well. To connect to a VPN, you must know specific information as well as the various settings you have to enter to be able to connect. You must obtain this information from the network’s administrator. After you have that information, you can configure iPhone to connect to the VPN.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the General screen.

2.

Press Network. The Network screen appears.

3.

Press VPN. The VPN screen appears.

1

2

Configuring Wi-Fi from the Network Screen On the Network screen, notice the Wi-Fi command. Pressing this takes you to the Wi-Fi Networks screen where you can configure iPhone to access a Wi-Fi network as you learned earlier in this chapter.

3

Connecting to VPNs

4.

Press OFF. The VPN status becomes ON, and the Add Configuration screen appears.

5.

Press L2TP, PPTP, or IPSec.

6.

Enter the required information in each field, including description, server, account, and so on. The specific information you need to enter depends on the kind of VPN you are accessing; the only way to know this information is to get it from the network administrator, who should tell you exactly the information you need to enter.

7.

171

4

5

Press Save. If the information you entered is correct, iPhone connects to the VPN. You move back to the VPN screen where you see the name of the VPN you configured. It is marked with a check mark to indicate iPhone is accessing it.

Ditching VPN To remove a VPN you no longer need, move to the VPN screen and press the VPN you want to remove. Scroll down the resulting screen and press Delete VPN. Confirm the delete, and the VPN is removed from iPhone.

7

6

172

8.

Chapter 4

Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs

To configure another VPN, press Add VPN Configuration. When you move back to the Network screen, you see the VPN to which you are connected in the VPN field. Once you’ve configured VPN, you see a VPN control on the Settings screen. You can use this to enable or disable VPN.

8

No Roaming Please! When you move outside of your primary network (such as outside the United States if that is where you live), you are in roaming territory, which means that a different provider provides both cellular and data access. Roaming charges can be associated with calls or data exchanges that happen. These charges are often quite expensive. The roaming charges associated with phone calls are easier to manage given that it’s more obvious when you make or receive a phone call. However, data roaming charges are much more insidious, especially if the push functionality (where emails are pushed to iPhone from the server) are active. Because data roaming charges are harder to notice, iPhone is configured by default to prevent data roaming. When you leave your primary network, you’ll no longer be able to access either the EDGE, 3G, or other wireless data networks that you primarily use (you can still use Wi-Fi networks). If you want to allow data roaming, move to the Network screen and press the Data Roaming OFF button. Its status becomes ON, and when you move outside your primary network, data will come to iPhone via the available network. This can be very, very expensive, so you should disable it again by pressing ON as soon as you’re done.

This page intentionally left blank

Press to configure email accounts and settings.

Press to use email.

In this chapter, you’ll explore all the email functionality that iPhone has to offer. Topics include the following: B B B B

Configuring email accounts on iPhone Configuring general email settings Managing email accounts Working with email

Emailing

5 3

For most of us, email is an important way to communicate with others, both in professional and personal life. Fortunately, iPhone has great email tools so that you can work with email no matter where you are. You can read, send, reply, and do all the other email actions you might expect from the comfort and convenience of your iPhone. You can configure multiple email accounts on iPhone so that you can access all of them there. Even better, you can sync iPhone’s email accounts with your computers so that you access the same email from multiple devices.

Get Connected It probably goes without saying, but I’ll say it anyway, to use email, you must have an Internet connection. To learn how to connect iPhone to the Internet, see Chapter 4,“Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs.”

176

Chapter 5

Emailing

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone Before you can start using iPhone for email, you have to configure the email accounts you want to access with it. iPhone supports a number of standard email services including MobileMe, Gmail, Yahoo!, and AOL. You can also configure any email account that uses POP (Post Office Protocol and no, I’m not making that up) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol); this is good because almost all email accounts provided through ISPs (Internet service providers) use one of these two formats. One of the major improvements made with the iPhone version 2.0 software is that iPhone also supports Exchange email, which is the dominant email system used in business. There are many ways to configure email accounts on iPhone. The specific methods you should use depend on the kind of email accounts you work with. The following options are explained in this section: • Using MobileMe just a few steps.

You can configure a MobileMe email account with

• Syncing with computers You can configure email accounts on iPhone by syncing with both Windows PCs and Macs. • Configuring Gmail, Yahoo! Mail, or AOL email accounts manually iPhone is designed to work with these email accounts and has specific account configuration tools for them. • Configuring other email accounts manually If you have an account that isn’t configured on a computer and isn’t one of those listed in the previous bullet, you can add it to iPhone manually with just a bit more work. After you have created the base email account on iPhone, you can do some advanced configuration to tweak the way it works. And, as noted earlier, you can also configure Exchange email accounts on iPhone.

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

177

>>>step-by-step Using MobileMe to Configure Email Accounts on iPhone If you have a MobileMe account, it is very simple to access your email (along with your contacts, calendar, and bookmarks) on iPhone (for information about obtaining and configuring a MobileMe account, see the Prologue). 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings.

2.

Scroll down the screen.

3.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. The Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen appears.

4.

Press Add Account…. You see the Add Account… screen.

5.

Press mobileme. You see the MobileMe account screen.

1

2

3

4

5

178

Chapter 5

Emailing

6.

Enter your name.

7.

Enter your MobileMe email address.

6

Enter your MobileMe account password.

8

8. 9.

Change the default description, which is your email address, if you want to. This description appears on various lists of accounts.

10 7 9

10. Press Save. Your account information is verified. When that process is complete, you see the MobileMe screen that you use to choose which elements of your MobileMe account are going to be synchronized on iPhone. 11. Ensure that the Mail status is ON to sync your MobileMe email to iPhone (if it is OFF, press OFF to change the status to ON). 12. Press Save. The account is synced to iPhone. You return to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen where you see your account on the Accounts list. The account is ready to use. 13. If you want to perform advanced configuration for the account, refer to Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone, later in this chapter.

12 11

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

179

Syncing Email Accounts with a Windows PC You can sync POP and IMAP email accounts from Outlook or Outlook Express on a Windows PC with iPhone to quickly configure it to work with email for those accounts.

4

5

1. Connect iPhone to your computer. 2.

Select iPhone on the Source list in iTunes.

3.

Click the Info tab.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Mail Accounts section.

5.

Check Sync selected mail accounts from.

6.

On the pop-up menu, choose the email application configured with the accounts you want to move onto iPhone.

7. Check the check box for each account you want to move onto iPhone.You can choose to move any or all of your email accounts in the selected application onto iPhone. 8. If you want the email accounts to replace the accounts currently on iPhone, check Mail Accounts; if you leave this unchecked, the selected email accounts are added to iPhone, leaving those already configured on it unchanged. 9.

Click Apply. The sync process runs, and the email accounts you selected move onto iPhone and are ready for you to use there.

10. Configure the accounts you synced using the steps in Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone, later in this chapter.

7

8

3

6

180

Chapter 5

Emailing

Syncing Email Accounts with a Mac You can sync email accounts from Mail or Entourage on a Mac with iPhone to quickly configure it to work with email for those accounts.

5

4

6

7

1. Connect iPhone to your computer. 2.

Select iPhone on the Source list in iTunes.

3.

Click the Info tab.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Mail Accounts section.

5.

Check Sync selected Mail accounts.

6.

Check the check box for each account you want to move onto iPhone. You can choose to move any or all of your email to iPhone.

7.

If you want the email accounts to replace the accounts currently on iPhone, check Mail Accounts; if you leave this unchecked, the selected email accounts are added to iPhone, leaving those already configured on it unchanged.

8.

Click Apply. The sync process runs, and the email configurations you selected move onto iPhone and are ready for you to use.

9.

Configure the accounts you synced using the steps in Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone, later in this chapter.

3

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

181

Configuring Gmail, Yahoo! Mail, or AOL Email Accounts on iPhone Manually iPhone is designed to work easily with email accounts from these providers. Setting up one of these accounts is similar to setting up a MobileMe account.

GMail POPs Is for Me If you don’t have a GMail account, you can sign up for a free one at mail.google.com. When you set up the account, make sure that you select the POP option. If you already have an account, log in to your Google account, choose GMail settings, click the Forwarding and POP tab, choose the Enable POP for all mail option, and save your changes. If your GMail account is not POPenabled, it won’t work on iPhone.

1.

On the Home screen, press Settings.

2.

Scroll down the screen.

3.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. The Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen appears.

2

3

182

Chapter 5

Emailing

4.

Press Add Account…. You see the Add Account… screen.

5.

Press the kind of account you want to configure. The rest of the steps are for a Gmail account, but configuring Yahoo! Mail or AOL accounts is similar. You see the account screen.

6.

Enter your name.

7.

Enter your Gmail email address.

8.

Enter your Gmail account password.

9.

Change the default description, which is your email address, if you want to. This description appears on various lists of accounts.

10. Press Save. Your account information is verified. When that process is complete, you see the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen, which shows the account you configured on the Accounts list. The account is ready to use. 11. If you want to perform advanced configuration of the account, refer to Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone, later in this chapter.

4

5

10 6 7 8 9

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

183

Configuring Other Email Accounts on iPhone Manually If you don’t configure an email account via syncing, and it isn’t one of the “standard” types shown previously, you can still configure it to work on iPhone with only slightly more work. When you obtain an email account, such as accounts that are part of your Internet service from an ISP, you should have received a document with all of the information you need to configure that account. If you don’t have this information, visit the provider’s website and look for information on configuring the email account on an email client. If you already have the account configured on an email client that you aren’t syncing for some reason, you can copy the information from the configuration screens in that application.You must have this information to be able to configure the account on iPhone.

Sync ‘Em If You’ve Got ‘Em If you have an email account already configured on a computer, there’s really no need to configure it manually on iPhone. It’s much easier just to sync the account onto iPhone.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Gather the configuration information for your email account, such as its type, your email address, your username, your password, incoming mail server, and outgoing mail server.

2.

On iPhone’s Home screen, press Settings.

3.

Scroll down the screen.

4.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. The Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen appears.

5.

Press Add Account…. You see the Add Account… screen.

3

4

5

184

Chapter 5

Emailing

6.

Press Other. You see the New Account screen.

7.

Enter your name.

8.

Enter your email address.

9.

Enter your email account password.

10. Change the default description, which is your email address, if you want to. This description appears on various lists of accounts. 11. Press Save. Your account information is verified. If iPhone can’t connect to the server using the information you provided via SSL, you see a prompt.

6

No SSL?

7

When you see a message about SSL (Secure Sockets Layer, a communication security protocol) not being available, press No to proceed without SSL. In case you’re wondering, SSL is used to encrypt data that is transferred over the Internet. Some email tools can work with SSL connections, while others can’t. If you can use it, you should, but if you can’t, it’s not something to worry about.

8

12.

Press No to clear the prompt. You move to the New Account screen with the information you’ve configured for the account so far.

11

9 10

12

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

13.

Press IMAP if the email account uses IMAP or POP if the account uses POP.

14.

Scroll down until you see both the Incoming Mail Server and Outgoing Mail Server options.

15. Check the information in the Incoming Mail server section, including the Host Name, your user name, and the password (the user name and password should be fine if you entered them correctly in the previous steps). iPhone attempts to create the appropriate host name based on the email address you entered; sometimes this is correct, sometimes it isn’t. 16.

If you need to change any of this information, press the appropriate field and enter the correct information.

17.

Enter the host name of the outgoing server in the Outgoing Mail Server field.This is usually something like smtp-server.domain.com.

18.

Enter the user name and password for the outgoing mail server; these are usually the same as for the incoming mail server. If you are using an SMTP server that isn’t associated with the email account you are configuring, use that user name and password instead.

19.

Press Save. The account information you entered is verified.

185

13

14

15 16

19 17 18

186

Chapter 5

Emailing

20. If the SSL prompt appears again, and the account doesn’t use SSL, press Yes to set it up without SSL. Once the account information is verified, the account is created, you move back to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen, and you see the new account on the Account list.

20

>>> Go Further

21. If you want to perform advanced configuration of the account, refer to Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone, later in this chapter.

PROBLEMS SENDING MAIL? You may have trouble sending email from some kinds of email accounts provided by an ISP when you aren’t using a network that isn’t provided by that ISP. For example, many email accounts provided by an ISP require that any mail being sent come from the IP address associated with that account, which means you can only send mail when you are accessing the Internet from a network with an IP address that the ISP’s network recognizes (such as your home network). This won’t be the case when you are out and about with iPhone using the 3G or Wi-Fi networks so you can’t send email from these accounts on iPhone. You’ll still be able to receive email for these accounts, but you won’t be able to send it. There are several possible solutions. The easiest one is to select an account from which you can send email when you are outside of your network when you compose or reply to email (how to do this is explained later in this chapter). In some cases, you can configure email to be sent by using a specific port (you usually have to search the ISP’s help information to find out what this is). To do this, you need to use the advanced configuration settings for the email account with which you are having trouble sending email; these are explained in the following section. The third option is to configure a different email account SMTP server (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)—the server that sends email—that you can send email from for the account that you can’t send email from; you use steps 17 through 19 or the information in the next section to do this. Finally, you can enable the SMTP server that your iPhone provider includes if it does provide one; this is also covered in the next section.

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone Different kinds of email accounts have different sets of advanced configuration options, but you access those options in a similar way for all accounts. The following steps show details for a MobileMe account. To do advanced configuration of other accounts you use similar steps, but the details for the specific accounts you are configuring will differ. 1.

Move the to Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen.

2.

Press the email account you want to configure. You move to the account configuration screen.

3.

Press Account Info. You see the Account Info screen, where you see the information you configured for the account when you added it.

4.

Press Advanced. You see the Advanced screen that you can use to set specific behaviors.

5.

Press Drafts Mailbox.

6.

To have drafts of your emails stored on iPhone, press Drafts, or to have them stored on the server, press INBOX.

187

2

3

4

5

6

188

7.

Chapter 5

Emailing

In the On the Server section, which appears only after you press INBOX in step 6, press the folder in which you want draft messages stored. The advantage of storing drafts on the server is that you can work on them from any location that can access your MobileMe account, such as a computer. If you save them on iPhone, you can only work on them using iPhone.

8.

Press Advanced.

9.

Using the information in steps 6 through 8, set the location where your sent mail is stored and where deleted messages are stored. The options are the same as for drafts.

8

7

9

10. Press Remove. 11. Choose when you want deleted email to be removed from the server. The longer the time frame, the longer storage space on the server is used for deleted messages, but the longer you will be able to recover those messages. In most cases, the amount of space you have on the email server associated with the email account is limited, so it’s better not to store messages you have deleted there for a long period of time. 12. Press Advanced.

10

12 11

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

13.

Scroll down so you see the Incoming Settings section.

14.

If you should ever need to change any of the settings that enable you to retrieve email for the account, use the fields in the Incoming Settings section to do so. It is unlikely you will need to change these settings, assuming you synced the account with a computer or were careful when you first configured it. If you ever do change the settings, you need to make sure they match the incoming mail server information provided for the email account by the ISP.

15.

Press Account Info. You move back to the Account Info screen.

16.

Press SMTP. You move to the SMTP screen for the account. Here, you see all of the SMTP servers for the various email accounts configured on iPhone. At the top of the screen is the primary server, which is the one that iPhone always tries first when you send email. The Other SMTP Servers list shows other servers that are configured. If a server’s status is On, iPhone will attempt to send email via that server if the primary fails. It’s useful if you have at least two SMTP servers On for each email account.

17.

If you need to change the configuration for the primary server, press it. You see the configuration screen for that SMTP server.

189

15 13

14

16

17

190

Chapter 5

Emailing

18. To turn the server off for the account, press ON; the status becomes OFF, and that server will not be used to send email from the account.

20 18 19

19. To change the server settings, use the fields in the Outgoing Mail Server area; the settings you use need to match the information provided by the organization that provides the server. 20. Press SMTP. 21. To enable another SMTP server for the account, press it on the Other SMTP Servers list. You move to the configuration screen for that SMTP server. 22. To enable the server for the account, press OFF so the status becomes ON. That server will be used when sending email if the primary account fails.

21

23. Press SMTP.

Changing SMTP Server Settings If the fields for an SMTP server are disabled, it means that the server is the primary for another email account, so you can’t change it from the current one. To make changes to that server, move to the Advanced screen for the email account for which it is the primary SMTP server, and use its tools to make the changes to the server settings.

22

23

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

24.

Enable or disable other SMTP servers.

25.

To add a new SMTP server, press Add Server… and then configure the server with the Add Server screen; you use the same type of settings as when you configure an email account.

191

26

24

25

Configuring Exchange Email Accounts on iPhone Manually Microsoft Exchange is the most widely used system for corporate email. iPhone email is compatible with Exchange, which is very good news indeed. There are two ways to connect iPhone to an Exchange account (which can include email, calendar, and contacts). One is to go through an Outlook Web Access (OWA) service; this service enables you to access your Exchange information over the Web. The good news about this is that you don’t need any support from the organization’s IT department to configure iPhone to access your Exchange account. The other option is for your organization’s Exchange system to be configured to support iPhone access directly; this does require support from the IT department. Some additional configuration work (and slight expense) is needed to enable this. If you already know you can access your Exchange account through OWA, you’re ready to configure your Exchange account on iPhone, and you can move ahead with the following steps. If you aren’t sure, check with your IT department to see if OWA is supported. If it is, use the following steps to configure it on iPhone. If OWA isn’t provided, find out if the Exchange system has been configured to support iPhones. If it has, get the configuration information you need from your IT department and use that to configure iPhone. (The following steps show an OWA configuration.)

192

Chapter 5

Emailing

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings.

2.

Scroll down the screen.

3.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. The Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen appears.

4.

Press Add Account…. You see the Add Account… screen.

5.

Press Exchange. You see the Exchange account screen.

6.

Enter your email address.

7.

Enter your domain and user name. (To enter a \ between the domain and user name, press the .?123 key and then press #+= key.)

8.

Enter your password.

9.

Enter a description of the account (the default is your email address).

10.

Press Next. The account information is verified, and you see the Exchange screen with your information and some additional fields.

2

3

4

5

10 6 7 8

Configuring Email Accounts on iPhone

11.

Enter the server address. If you are using OWA, this might be something like owa.yourcompany.com. You don’t enter the https:// before the address you use to move to the server via a web browser nor the /exchange after that address. If you’re not using OWA, enter the address provided by your IT department.

12.

Press Next. The account information is verified, and you see the controls that enable you to determine which information is synced on iPhone.

13.

Press ON for any of the information you don’t want to be moved onto iPhone; its status becomes OFF to show you it won’t be synced on iPhone.

14.

Press Save. The sync is configured, and you move back to the the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen where you see your Exchange account.

15.

Press your Exchange account.

16.

Press Mail days to sync.

193

12

11

14

13

15

16

194

Chapter 5

Emailing

17. Press the amount of time over which Exchange information should be synced. For example, to have one week of Exchange information on iPhone, press 1 Week. 18. Press the account button labeled with your email address.

18

17

19. Press Mail… to return to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen.

19

Configuring General Email Settings There are several settings you use to configure how iPhone handles your email.

>>>step-by-step Configuring How Email is Retrieved There are several ways email is retrieved on iPhone. Using Push, email is automatically pushed from the email server onto iPhone. Not all email accounts support push (MobileMe and Exchange accounts do), but its benefit is that email on iPhone is always in sync with the email server. The downside is that pushing email to iPhone consumes more battery power because of the near constant activity. iPhone can also fetch email, which means that it contacts the server at defined intervals to

Configuring General Email Settings

get email. This approach doesn’t retrieve email as fast as pushing, but it does use much less battery power. You can set iPhone to fetch email at specific intervals, or you can fetch email manually.

195

2

1.

On the Home screen, press Settings.

2.

Press Fetch New Data. You see the Fetch New Data screen.

3

3.

To enable email to be pushed to iPhone, ensure the Push status is ON (if it isn’t, press OFF to turn it on); or to disable push to extend battery life, press ON so the status becomes OFF.

5

4.

Press the amount of time that you want iPhone to fetch email when Push is OFF. Or for accounts that don’t support push, press Manually if you want to only check for email manually.

5.

Scroll down the screen.

6.

Press Advanced. You see the Advanced screen that contains a list of all your active email accounts. Next to each account, you see if it is configured to use Push, Fetch, or Manual.

7.

To change how an account gets email or other information, press it. You see the account’s screen. The options on this screen depend on the kind of account it is. You may see Push or Fetch, but all accounts have the Manual option.

4

6

7

196

Chapter 5

Emailing

8.

Press the option you want to use for the account.

9.

Press Advanced.

9

10. Repeat steps 7 through 9 for each account. 11. Press Fetch New Data.

8 11

Configuring Global Email Settings iPhone includes a number of settings that affect all of your email accounts. You can also set preferences for specific email accounts, as you learn later in this chapter. 1.

Move to the Settings screen.

2.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

3.

Scroll down until you see the Mail section.

4.

Press Show. The Show screen appears.

5.

Press the number of recent messages you want iPhone to display in the email application.

6.

Press Mail….

10

4

6 5

Configuring General Email Settings

7.

Press Preview. The Preview screen appears.

8.

Press the number of lines you want iPhone to display for each email when you view the inbox.

9.

197

7

Press Mail….

10. Press Minimum Font Size. The Minimum Font Size screen appears. 11. Press the smallest font size you want iPhone to use for email. The larger the size, the easier to read, but the less information fits on a single screen. 12. Press Mail….

9

8

10

12 11

198

Chapter 5

Emailing

13. Press Show To/Cc Label to see the To and Cc labels in email headers. 14. If you don’t want to have to confirm when you delete messages, press Ask Before Deleting ON. Its status becomes OFF, and you don’t have to confirm that you want to delete a message when you press its Delete button. 15. If you want to receive a blind copy of each email you send, press Always Bcc Myself OFF. Its status becomes ON, and each time you send a message, you also receive a copy of it, but your address is not shown to the other recipients. 16. Press Signature. The Signature screen appears.

13 14 15 16 18

17

17. Enter the signature you want to append to each message you send. 18. Press Mail…. 19. Press Default Account. The Default Account screen appears.

19

Managing Email Accounts

20.

Press the account you want to be your default. The default account appears at the top of lists and is used as the From address for emails you send. (You can change it on messages when you send them.) It is also the one used when you send photos, YouTube videos, and so on.

21.

Press Mail…. You move back to the Mail screen. Now enable or disable email sounds.

22.

Press Settings.

23.

Press Sounds.

24.

Scroll down the screen.

25.

To hear a sound when you receive new mail, make sure that the ON status for New Mail is shown; press OFF to turn the new mail sound to ON or press ON to turn it to OFF.

26.

To hear a sound when you send mail, make sure that the ON status for Sent Mail is displayed; press ON to turn the sent mail sound off or OFF to turn it on again. Your global email configuration is complete.

199

21 20

22

23

24

25 26

200

Chapter 5

Emailing

Managing Email Accounts There are a number of ways in which you can manage your email accounts.

Changing Email Account Configurations As you work with your email accounts, you might need to make changes from time to time. The specific changes you can make depend on the type of account you are changing. The general steps to change an account follow. 1.

Move to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen.

2.

Press the account you want to change.

3.

Use the ON and OFF buttons to enable or disable information to sync with the account.

4.

Press Account Info.

5.

Use the Account Info screen to make changes to the account. This screen is explained in the section Performing Advanced Configuration of Email Accounts on iPhone, previously in this chapter.

2

4

3

5

Managing Email Accounts

201

Disabling Email Accounts You can disable POP or IMAP email accounts so that they are not used in iPhone’s email application but remain configured on iPhone should you want to use them again. 1.

Move to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen.

2.

Press the account you want to disable.

3.

Press Account ON so its status becomes OFF. The email account is no longer used by iPhone’s Mail application.

4.

Press Mail…. When you return to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen, you see the kind of information being synced for active accounts or the Inactive status for disabled accounts.

2

4 3 Information being synced for an active account

Inactive accounts

202

Chapter 5

Emailing

Deleting Email Accounts If you no longer want to receive email from an account on iPhone, you can delete it. Of course, the account still exists; you just won’t get email from it on iPhone. You can still use it with an email application, via the Web, and so on. (You can restore it to iPhone by syncing it or by recreating it manually.) 1.

Move to the Mail, Contacts, Calendars screen.

2.

Press the account you want to delete.

3.

Scroll to the bottom of the screen.

4.

Press Delete Account.

5.

Press Delete Account at the prompt. The account is removed from iPhone.

2

3

4

5

Working with Email

203

Working with Email After you configure email accounts on iPhone, you’re ready to start using those accounts for all your email needs. When you move to the Home screen, you see the number of new email messages you have in the Mail button. Even if you don’t have any new email, the Mail button leads you to iPhone’s email application.

>>>step-by-step Receiving and Reading Email iPhone’s Mail application enables you to receive and read email for all the email accounts configured on it that are active. 1.

On the Home screen, press Mail. The Mail application opens, and you move to the last screen you used. If that isn’t the Accounts screen, press the return button in the upper left corner of the screen until you reach the Accounts screen. Skip to step 3 if you have only one email account configured on iPhone. You know this applies to you if you don’t have an accounts screen because you always move directly to your email account’s screen when you press the Mail button. Next to each account, you see the number of new emails received in that account.

You’ve got mail (email that is).

204

Chapter 5

Emailing

2. To read messages, press the account that contains messages you want to read.You move to that account’s screen; the name of the account is the account’s description, which defaults to the email address.You see all the folders within that account.The number and type of folders you see depends on the type of account it is.

2

3

Loading More Messages If more messages are available than are downloaded, press the Load More Messages link. The additional messages download to the inbox you are viewing.

3.

4. 5.

Press Inbox. The inbox for that account opens, and you see all the messages it contains. Unread messages are marked with a blue dot. A paperclip icon indicates that a message includes an attachment. At the bottom of the screen, you see when the inbox was last updated, meaning the last time messages were retrieved.

Who the message is from

Attachment When it was received

Scroll up or down the screen to browse all the messages. To read a message, press it. The message screen appears. As soon as you open a message’s screen, it’s marked as read, and the email counter reduces by 1. At the top of the screen, you see the number of the message and the total in the inbox (such as 2 of 10). Just below that is the address information, including who the message is from and who it was sent to. Under that, you see the message’s

5 4 Subject Preview Unread

When email was last retrieved

Working with Email

205

subject along with time and date it was sent. Under that, you see the body of the message. If the message has an attachment, you see it at the bottom of the screen. 6. Unpinch or double-press your finger on the message to zoom in. If you double-press on a column of text, it resizes to fit the screen.

Sender Subject, time, and date email was sent Body

See More Address Info? Press the Details link located just under the down arrow at the top of the email screen to show more address information, such as the To and Cc sections. Press Details to hide that information again.

7.

8.

Drag the message around the screen to read it. To scroll up or down, left or right, just drag your finger around the screen.

7 Attachment

Pinch your fingers or doublepress to zoom out.

Photos Attached If the message includes a photo, iPhone displays the photo in the body of the email message. You can zoom in or out and scroll to view it just as you can with text.

9.

6

To view a message’s attachment, press it. If iPhone can display files of its type, the file downloads to iPhone, and you see the file on a screen with the file’s title as its name. If iPhone can’t display the attachment, you’ll just see an icon for the attachment with no button to view it.

8

9

206

Chapter 5

Emailing

10. Scroll the document by dragging your finger up, down, left, or right on the screen.

13

10

11. Unpinch or double-press to zoom in.

11

12. Pinch or double-press to zoom out. 13. Press Message. You move back to the Message screen.

12

14. To view information for an email address, such as who sent the message, press it. The Info screen appears; its title tells you how the person relates to the message. For example, if you pressed the email address in the From field, the screen title is From. If the person is on your Contacts list, you see his contact information. If not, you see as much information as iPhone can determine based on the email address.

14

HTML Email Mail can receive HTML email that behaves like a webpage. When you press a link (usually blue text, but can also be photos and other graphics) in such an email, Safari opens and takes you to the link’s source. You then use Safari to view the webpage. See Chapter 6, “Surfing the Web,” for information about Safari.

15.

Press Message. You move back to the email.

15

Working with Email

16.

To read the next message in the inbox, press the down arrow. The next message in the Inbox list replaces the current one.

17.

To move to a previous message in the inbox, press the up arrow.

18.

To move back to the inbox, press Inbox.

18

207

16 17

Large Messages Some emails, especially HTML messages, are large and don’t immediately download to iPhone in their entirety. When you open a large message, you see that the entire message has not been downloaded. Press the link to download the rest of it.

Sending Email You can send email from any of your accounts. 1.

Press the New Mail button on any Mail screen. The New Message screen appears. The From address is your default email account unless you were viewing a screen for a different account, in which case that account is used as the From address. Your signature is placed at the bottom of the message.

1

208

2.

Chapter 5

Emailing

To type a recipient’s email address, press the To field and type in the address using iPhone’s keyboard. As you type, iPhone attempts to find matching addresses in your Contacts list or in emails you’ve sent or received and displays the matches it finds. To select one of those addresses, press it, and iPhone enters the rest of the address for you. Or just keep entering information until the address is complete.

3.

To address the email using contacts, press Add Contact. The All Contacts screen appears.

4.

Use the All Contacts screen to select an email address (see Chapter 2,“Managing Contacts,” for details about contacts). When you select a contact, the address is pasted into the To field, and you return to the New Message window.

5.

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add all the recipients to the message.

6.

Press the Cc/Bcc, From line. The Cc and Bcc lines expand.

Removing Addresses To remove an address, press it and then press the Delete button on iPhone’s keyboard.

2

3

4

5 6

Working with Email

7.

Use steps 2 though 4 to add recipients to the Cc field.

8.

Use steps 2 though 4 to add recipients to the Bcc field.

9.

To change the account from which the email is sent, press the From field. The account wheel appears at the bottom of the screen.

8

209

7 9

10. Press the account you want to use to send the message. It is marked with a check mark, and the address is placed in the From field. 11. Press in the Subject line. The account wheel closes.

11

10

210

Chapter 5

Emailing

12. Type the subject of the message. 13. Scroll down the screen until you see the body area. 14. Press in the body and type the body of the message above your signature. As you type, iPhone attempts to correct spelling and makes suggestions to complete words. To accept a proposed change, press the spacebar when the suggestion appears on the screen; to ignore a correction, press the x in the suggestion box.

12

15. When you finish the message, press Send. iPhone sends it.

Saving Your Work in Progress If you want to save a message without sending it, press Cancel. A prompt appears; choose Save to save the message. When you want to work on the message again, move to the account’s screen and open the Drafts folder. Press the message, and you move back to the New Message screen as it was when you pressed the Cancel button. You can make more changes to the message and then send it or save it again.

Sending Email from All the Right Places You can send email from a number of different places on iPhone. For example, you can share a photo with someone by pressing the Email button. Or you can press a contact’s email address to send an email from your contacts list. For yet another example, you can share a YouTube video. In all cases, iPhone creates a new message that includes the appropriate content, such as a photo or link, and you use Mail’s tools to complete and send the email.

15

14 13

Working with Email

211

>>>step-by-step Replying to Email Email is all about communication, so Mail makes it simple to reply to messages. 1.

Move to the message you want to reply to.

2.

Press the Action button. A prompt appears.

3.

Press Reply to reply to only the sender or press Reply All to reply to everyone who received the original message. (You only see Reply All if the message was sent to more than one person.) The Re: screen appears showing a new message addressed to just the sender or to everyone who received the message, depending on the action you selected. iPhone pastes the contents of the original message at the bottom of the body of the new message below your signature.

4.

Use the message tools to write your reply, to add more To or Cc recipients, or to make any other changes you want.

5.

Press Send. iPhone sends your reply.

2

3

5

4

212

Chapter 5

Emailing

Forwarding Email When you receive an email that you think someone else should see, you can forward it to them. 1.

Read the message you want to forward.

2.

Press the Action button. A prompt appears.

3.

Press Forward. The Forward screen appears. iPhone pastes the contents of the message you are forwarding at the bottom of the message, below your signature.

4.

Address the forwarded message using the same tools that you use when you create a new message.

5.

Type your commentary about the message above your signature.

6.

Edit the forwarded content as needed.

7.

Press Send. iPhone forwards the message.

Large Messages Some emails, especially HTML messages, are large so that they don’t immediately download to iPhone in their entirety. When you forward such messages before they finish downloading, iPhone prompts you to wait until the download finishes before forwarding. If you choose not to wait, iPhone forwards only the downloaded part of the message.

2

3

7 4

5

Working with Email

213

Checking for New Messages

Get new mail.

You can check for new mail from any Inbox or message screen by pressing the Get New Mail button. iPhone gets and downloads all the email for that account since iPhone last checked it. If you get new mail from the Accounts screen, messages in all your accounts are retrieved. The bottom of the Mail screens always shows the status of the most recent check.

Determining the Status of Messages

Read message

Message you’ve forwarded Message to which you’ve replied

Unread message

When you view an Inbox, you see icons next to each message to indicate its status (except for messages that you’ve read but not done anything else with).

214

Chapter 5

Emailing

Deleting Email from the Message Screen

Delete the message.

To delete a message while viewing it, press the Trash can. If you’ve configured the warning preference, confirm the deletion, and iPhone deletes the message. If you’ve disabled the confirmation, iPhone deletes the message immediately.

Dumpster Diving As long as an account’s trash hasn’t been emptied (you learned how to set that earlier in the chapter by configuring the Remove setting for an account), you can work with a message you’ve deleted by moving to the account’s screen and opening the Trash folder.

Working with Email

215

>>>step-by-step Deleting Email from the Inbox 1.

Move to the inbox for the account from which you want to delete email.

2.

Press Edit. A selection circle appears next to each message. The Delete and Move buttons appear at the bottom of the screen.

3.

Select the messages you want to delete by pressing their selection circles. As you select each message, the counter in the Delete button increases by one, and the message’s selection circle is marked with a check mark.

4.

1

2

3

Press Delete. iPhone deletes the selected messages and exits Edit mode.

Yet Another Way to Delete While you are on the Inbox screen, drag your finger to the left or right across a message. The Delete button appears. Press it to delete the message.

4

216

Chapter 5

Emailing

Organizing Email from the Message Screen 1.

Open a message that you want to move to a folder.

2.

Press the Mailboxes button. The Mailboxes screen appears. At the top of this screen, you see the current message. Under that, you see the mailboxes available under the current account.

3.

Press the folder to which you want to move the message. The message moves to that folder, and you move to the next message in the Inbox.

2

3

Working with Email

Organizing Email from the Inbox 1.

Move to the inbox for the account from which you want to organize email.

2.

Press Edit. A selection circle appears next to each message. The Delete and Move buttons appear at the bottom of the screen.

3.

Select the messages you want to move by pressing their selection circles. As you select each message, the counter in the Move button increases by one, and the message’s selection circle is marked with a check mark.

4.

Press Move. The Mailboxes screen appears.

5.

Press the folder into which you want to place the messages. They are moved into that folder, and you return to the Inbox, which is no longer in Edit mode.

217

2

3

4

5

218

Chapter 5

Emailing

It’s Not All Good You can’t create new mail folders on iPhone. To create a new folder for an account, use another tool, such as an email application on your computer or the account’s website. New folders become available on the account’s screen on iPhone after you sync iPhone.

>>>step-by-step Viewing Messages in a Folder 1.

Move to the account screen for the account containing the folders and messages you want to view. You see all the folders for the account.

2.

Press the folder containing the items you want to view. That folder’s screen appears on which you see the messages it contains.

3.

Press a message to view it.

2

3

Working with Email

219

Saving an Image Attached to a Message 1.

Move to the message screen for an email that contains images.

2.

Press the Action button.

3.

Press Save X Images, where X is the number of images attached to the message. The images are saved in the Photo Roll album in the Photos application (see Chapter 9, “Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos,” for help working with the Photos application). The next time you sync iPhone, the images are moved onto the computer.

2

3

It’s Not All Good iPhone’s Mail doesn’t include any spam tools. If you put an already-spammed address on iPhone, all the spam is going to come right to your iPhone, which can be a nuisance. The best thing to do is to keep your important addresses from being spammed. Consider using a “sacrificial” email account when you shop, post messages, and in the other places where you’re likely to get spammed. If you do get spammed, you can stop using the sacrificial account and create another one to take its place. Or you can delete the sacrificial account from iPhone and continue to use it on your computer where you likely have spam tools in place. A more complicated way to avoid spam on iPhone is by filtering all email through an account that does have spam filtering. For example, you can create a GMail account and route all your email through it. Use the GMail account’s spam tool to manage the spam and then add only that GMail account to iPhone.

Configure Safari.

Get on the Web wherever you are.

In this chapter, you’ll explore all the Web browsing functionality that iPhone has to offer. The topics include the following: B B B B

Configuring Safari settings Moving favorites from a Windows PC to iPhone Moving bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone Browsing the Web

6

Surfing the Web Wouldn’t it be nice to be able to browse the Web wherever you are using a real web browser instead of the modified browsers available on most smart phones? And wouldn’t it be nice not to have to be concerned with pages being formatted for proper display on a mobile device? What if you could just use the regular Web on a cell phone? Obviously, because you have an iPhone, you know you have all these niceties because iPhone has a full-featured web browser: Safari.

Speed Matters Remember that there can be several ways you can connect iPhone to the Internet to surf the Web.The specific methods you can use depend on your location. For example, in the United States, there are three options. In the order of speed they are: Wi-Fi, 3G, and EDGE. When available, you want to use a Wi-Fi connection because that will provide you with the best performance.The 3G network is a bit slower but still plenty fast for a good Web experience.The last option is the EDGE network, which is really too slow for many websites, but it’s better than no Web access at all. See Chapter 4,“Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs,” to learn how to connect iPhone to the Internet with all of these methods. In other countries, you may have different options for the high- or low-speed cell access to the Web, but you always want to use the fastest connection possible.

222

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Configuring Safari Settings Before you surf, take a couple of minutes to configure iPhone’s Safari settings.

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

2.

Scroll down the page until you see Safari.

3.

Press Safari. The Safari screen appears.

4.

To leave Google as the default search engine, skip to step 7. To change the default search engine from Google to Yahoo!, press Search Engine. The Search Engine screen appears.

5.

6.

7.

Press Yahoo!. It is now checked to show you that it is the selected search engine. Press Safari. You move back to the Safari screen, and Yahoo! is shown as the search engine. To disable JavaScript functionality, press JavaScript ON. Its status becomes OFF to show you it is no longer active. Some webpages might not work properly with JavaScript turned off, but it is more secure. I recommend you leave JavaScript on unless you’re sure that the sites you visit don’t need it.

2

3

4

6

5

Configuring Safari Settings

8.

9.

To disable plug-ins, press Plug-Ins ON. Its status becomes OFF, and plug-ins no longer work with Safari. Plug-ins are additional code snippets that enable a web browser to perform specific functions with given content.The most common example, which unfortunately doesn’t run on iPhone’s web browser, is Adobe’s Flash that is used to deliver dynamic content (such as video) over the Web. On iPhone, you can only enable or disable plug-ins, you can’t choose specific plug-ins to install or manage as you can with a web browser on a computer. In almost all cases, you should leave plug-ins turned on. To disable pop-up blocking, press Block Pop-ups ON. Its status becomes OFF, and pop-ups are no longer blocked. In most cases, you want to block pop-ups because they are primarily advertising or attempts to get information from you. Some websites won’t work properly with pop-ups blocked, so you can use this setting to temporarily enable pop-ups while you use a specific website.

10. To configure how cookies are handled, press Accept Cookies. The Accept Cookies screen appears. 11. Press the kind of cookies you want to accept.The None option blocks all cookies.The From visited option accepts cookies only from sites you visit.The Always option accepts all cookies. Most people should choose the From visited option because it enables websites you visit to store information on iPhone they need to work properly. 12. Press Safari.

223

7 8 9

10

12

11

224

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

13.

To clear the history of websites you have visited, press Clear History.

14.

Press Clear History at the prompt. This removes the websites you have visited from your history list. The list starts over, so the next site you visit is added to your history list again.

15.

To remove all cookies from iPhone, scroll down the screen and press Clear Cookies.

16.

Press Clear Cookies at the prompt. Any sites that require cookies to function re-create the cookies they need the next time you visit them, assuming that you allow cookies.

13

14

15

16

Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC to iPhone

225

17. To clear the web browser’s cache, press Clear Cache. The cache stores information from websites so that you can return to that information without downloading it from the Web again. 18. When prompted, press Clear Cache to confirm the action. The next time you visit a site, its content is downloaded to iPhone again.

17

18

Developer? The Developer setting enables the Debug Console to be turned on or off. The Debug Console enables website developers to check their websites on iPhone for errors so that those sites can be updated to work properly with iPhone. If you aren’t a website developer, you probably won’t need to use this tool. If you are a website developer, enable the tool when you are evaluating your website using Safari on iPhone.

Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC to iPhone You can move your Internet Explorer favorites or Safari bookmarks from another browser to iPhone so that you can use them to access the same websites on iPhone that you do on your computer. There are two ways to do this. One is by synching your iPhone. The other is by using MobileMe.

226

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

It’s Not All Good If you prefer Firefox as your web browser, you are out of luck when it comes to moving your bookmarks to iPhone with either method; you can only sync Internet Explorer favorites or Safari bookmarks. That’s really too bad and is quite annoying for those of us for whom Firefox is our browser of choice. There’s currently just no simple way to move bookmarks to or from iPhone from or to Firefox. Hopefully, Apple will remove this web browser discrimination in an update to its software soon.

>>>step-by-step Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC onto iPhone via Sync Moving favorites onto iPhone by syncing it is a lot like moving other kinds of information onto it. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes if it doesn’t open automatically.

2.

Select iPhone on the Source list.

3.

Click the Info tab.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Web Browser section.

5.

Check the Sync bookmarks from check box.

6.

Choose the web browser on the pop-up menu containing the bookmarks or favorites you want to move onto iPhone.

7.

If you want to replace the bookmarks on iPhone with those you’re moving from the PC, check Bookmarks in the Advanced section. If you leave this unchecked, the favorites or bookmarks from the PC are added to those on iPhone.

2

4

5

7

6

Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC to iPhone

8.

227

Click Apply. iPhone is synced, and each time you sync iPhone, your bookmarks or favorites move onto it.

Moving Favorites or Bookmarks from a Windows PC onto iPhone Using MobileMe Using a USB cable to move information onto iPhone is useful, but wouldn’t it be nice if the information was moved without your having to do anything? With MobileMe, bookmarks are automatically pushed onto iPhone (along with other useful information, such as email) over the air for you. To make this happen, you just have to configure MobileMe on your PC so it automatically moves your favorites from the computer to the MobileMe “cloud” from where they move onto iPhone. The process works in the opposite direction, too. When you update bookmarks on iPhone, they get moved onto the PC. To set up MobileMe for favorites or bookmarks, do the following.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Open the MobileMe control panel.

2.

Click the Sync tab.

3.

Check the Bookmarks check box.

4.

On the Bookmarks drop-down list, choose the web browser for which you want to move favorites or bookmarks onto iPhone.

5.

2

3

Click OK. The favorites or bookmarks are moved from the PC to the MobileMe cloud.

5

4

228

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

6.

On the iPhone, open the Settings screen.

7.

Scroll down until you see Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

8.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. That screen appears.

9.

Press your MobileMe account. Your account screen appears.

10. Make sure the Bookmarks status is ON. If it is OFF, press OFF to turn it on. Your favorites or bookmarks are moved from the MobileMe cloud onto iPhone. When you make changes to bookmarks on iPhone, those changes are moved back to the MobileMe cloud from where they are moved back on to the PC as well.

6

7

8

9

MobileMe Revealed To sync favorites via MobileMe, you must have a MobileMe account and configure MobileMe syncing on your computer. Details about MobileMe are provided in the Prologue.

10

Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone You can move your Mac’s Safari bookmarks to iPhone so that you can use them to access the same websites on iPhone that you do on your computer. There are two ways to do this. One is by syncing your iPhone. The other is by using MobileMe.

Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone

229

It’s Not All Good If you prefer Firefox as your web browser, you are out of luck when it comes to moving your bookmarks to iPhone with either method. That’s really too bad and is quite annoying for those of us for whom Firefox is our browser of choice. There’s currently just no simple way to move bookmarks to or from iPhone from or to Firefox. Hopefully, Apple will remove this web browser discrimination in an update to its software soon. If you want to build an initial set of bookmarks on iPhone based on your Firefox bookmarks, you can import Firefox bookmarks into Safari and then move your Safari bookmarks onto iPhone. To do this, open Safari’s File menu and choose Import Bookmarks. Using the Import Bookmarks dialog, move to the Library folder within your Home folder. Then move to Application Support followed by Firefox, Profiles, and your profile’s folder. Select the bookmarks.html file and click Import. Your Firefox bookmarks are moved into Safari. Unfortunately, they are moved into one folder that is labeled imported date, where date is the date on which you imported them. If you don’t want them to be moved onto iPhone like this, you need to use Safari’s bookmarks tools to reorganize them as you want them to be on iPhone. When you’re done, you can move them onto iPhone. Unfortunately, you’d have to go through the same drill each time you make changes in Firefox (or the reverse order if you make changes on iPhone), which is a lot of hassle. However, it might be worth doing once, just to get your initial set of bookmarks on iPhone. You then have to make changes to bookmarks on iPhone manually.

>>>step-by-step Moving Favorites from a Mac onto iPhone via Sync Moving favorites onto iPhone by syncing it is a lot like moving other kinds of information onto it. 1.

Connect iPhone to your Mac and open iTunes if it doesn’t open automatically.

230

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

2.

Select iPhone on the Source list.

3.

Click the Info tab.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Web Browser section.

5.

Check the Sync Safari bookmarks check box.

6.

If you want the bookmarks you’re moving from the Mac to replace those on iPhone, check Bookmarks in the Advanced section. If you leave this unchecked, the bookmarks from the Mac are added to those on iPhone.

7.

4

2

5

6

Click Apply. A sync is performed, and your bookmarks are moved onto iPhone. Each time you sync iPhone, your bookmarks are moved onto it, and any changes to bookmarks you make on iPhone are moved back to Safari.

Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone Using MobileMe Using a USB cable to move information onto iPhone is useful, but wouldn’t it be nice if the information was moved without your having to do anything? With MobileMe, bookmarks are automatically pushed onto iPhone (along with other useful information, such as email) over the air for you. To make this happen, you just have to configure MobileMe on your Mac so it automatically moves your bookmarks from the computer to the MobileMe “cloud” from where they move onto iPhone. The process works in the opposite direction, too. When you update bookmarks on iPhone, they get moved onto the Mac. To set up MobileMe for favorites or bookmarks, do the following.

MobileMe Revealed To sync favorites via MobileMe, you must have a MobileMe account and configure MobileMe syncing on your computer. Details about MobileMe are provided in the Prologue.

Moving Bookmarks from a Mac to iPhone

1.

Open the MobileMe pane of the System Preferences application.

2.

Click the Sync tab.

3.

Check the Bookmarks check box. The next time a sync is performed, your Safari bookmarks are moved from the Mac onto the MobileMe cloud. (Note: this step assumes that the Synchronize with MobileMe check box is checked and Automatically is selected on the pop-up menu. See the Prologue for details about configuring MobileMe.)

4.

On the iPhone, open the Settings screen.

5.

Scroll down until you see Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

6.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars. That screen appears.

7.

Press your MobileMe account. Your account screen appears.

8.

Make sure the Bookmarks status is ON. If it is OFF, press OFF so it becomes ON. Your favorites or bookmarks are moved from the MobileMe cloud onto iPhone. When you make changes to bookmarks on iPhone, those changes are moved back to the MobileMe cloud from where they are moved back to the Mac as well.

3

4

2

231

1

5

6

7

8

232

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Browsing the Web on iPhone If you’ve used a web browser on a computer before, using Safari on iPhone will be a familiar experience. If you’ve not used a web browser before, don’t worry because using Safari on iPhone is simple and intuitive.

>>>step-by-step Moving to Websites via Bookmarks Using bookmarks that you’ve moved from a computer onto iPhone makes it easy to get to websites that are of interest to you. You can also create bookmarks on iPhone (you learn how later in this section) and use them just like bookmarks you’ve imported from a computer. 1. 2.

On the iPhone Home screen, press Safari. Safari opens.

1

Press the Bookmarks button. The Bookmarks screen appears.

2

Browsing the Web on iPhone

233

Bookmark folder 3.

Scroll up or down the list of bookmarks.

4.

To move to a bookmark, skip to step 9. To open a folder of bookmarks, press it. The folder’s screen appears.

5.

Scroll up or down the folder’s screen.

6.

You can keep drilling down into folders by pressing the folder whose bookmarks you want to see.

7.

To return to a previous screen, press the return button, which is labeled with the name of the current folder you are viewing, the folder you most recently visited, or Bookmarks if you are viewing a folder on the “top” level of the Bookmarks folder.

Change Your Mind? If you decide not to visit a bookmark, press Done. You return to the page you were previously viewing.

8.

Repeat steps 5 through 7 until you see a bookmark you want to visit.

9.

Press the bookmark you want to visit. Safari moves to that website.

3

4

Bookmark

7

9

5

234

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

10. Use the information in the section titled Viewing Websites to view the webpage.

iPhone Webpages Some websites have been especially formatted for iPhone. These typically have less complex information on each page so they load faster (which is helpful if you are using the EDGE network). When you move to a site like this, you’ll be redirected to the iPhone version automatically. There is typically a link that takes you to the “regular” version too (it’s sometimes called the classic version).

10

Moving to Websites by Typing a URL Although it might not be fun to type URLs, sometimes that’s the only way you have to get to a website. 1. 2.

On the iPhone Home screen, press Safari. Safari opens. Press in the Address bar. The keyboard appears along with the Search bar. If you’ve visited a site recently, the URL of the current webpage appears in the Address bar, and the page you last visited appears on the screen.

2

Browsing the Web on iPhone

3.

4.

5.

6.

If an address appears in the Address bar, press the Clear button to remove it. Type the URL you want to visit. If it starts with www, you don’t have to type “www.” As you type, Safari attempts to match what you are typing to a site you have visited previously or to one of your bookmarks and presents a list of those sites to you. If one of the sites shown is the one you want to visit, press it. You move to that webpage; skip to step 8.

4

235

3

5

7

If Safari doesn’t find a match, continue typing until you enter the entire URL.

8

.com for All Because so many URLs end in .com, there’s a handy .com key on the keyboard.

7.

Press Go. You move to the webpage.

8.

Use the information in the section that follows to view the webpage.

236

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Viewing Websites Even though iPhone is a small device, you’ll be amazed at how well it displays webpages designed for larger screens. Unlike most smart phones, you can view and work with standard webpages about as well as you can with a computer. 1.

Use Safari to move to a webpage as described in the previous two sections.

2.

To scroll a webpage, drag your finger right or left or up or down.

3.

To zoom in manually, unpinch your fingers.

4.

To zoom in automatically, press your finger on the screen twice.

5.

To zoom out manually, pinch your fingers.

6.

To zoom on a column or a figure, press it twice.

7.

To move to a link, press it once. The webpage to which the link points opens.

1

4 2

3

6

7

Viewing Links To zoom a link to see where it points, press your finger on it and hold your finger down. A text balloon pops up to show you the link’s information. When you lift your finger, you move to the linked page. If you decide not to visit the link, drag your finger off the link before you lift your finger off the screen.

5

Browsing the Web on iPhone

8.

Scroll and zoom on the page to read it.

9.

To zoom in or out automatically, press the screen twice.

237

10

10. To stop a page while it’s loading, press the Stop button. 11. To refresh a page, press Refresh.

12.

To view the Web in landscape mode, rotate iPhone clockwise or counter-clockwise.

13.

To move to a previous page you’ve visited, press Back.

14.

To move to a subsequent page, press Forward.

9

8

11

Where Art Thou, Address Bar? If you lose sight of the Address bar when you’re scrolling pages, press the status bar, where the time displays, once. You scroll to the top of the screen and can see the Address bar again.

13

14

238

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Searching the Web Earlier you learned that you can use Safari to search the Web using Google or Yahoo!. Whichever search engine you choose, you search the Web in the same way. 1.

Move to a webpage and press the Address bar.

2.

Press in the Search bar, which before you start typing has Google or Yahoo in the background to show you which engine you are using.

3.

Type your search word(s). As you type, iPhone makes suggestions to correct spelling; press the spacebar to accept it.

4.

When you’ve entered your search term, press Google or Yahoo! (the button name depends on the search engine you are using). The website performs the search, and you see the results on the search results page.

5.

Use the search results page to view the results of your search. These pages work just like other webpages. You can zoom, scroll, and click links to explore results.

3

2

4

5

Browsing the Web on iPhone

239

Returning to Previous Websites As you move about the Web, Safari tracks the sites you visit and builds a history list. You can use this list to return to sites you’ve visited.

1

1.

Open a webpage and press the Bookmarks button. The Bookmarks screen appears.

2.

If necessary, scroll to the top of the page so that you see the History folder.

3

3.

Press History. The History screen appears.

2

4.

Scroll the page to browse all the sites you’ve visited. The most recent sites appear at the top of the screen. Earlier sites are collected in folders for each day, starting with Earlier Today and moving back one day at a time.

5.

To return to a site, skip to step 6. To view sites in one of the folders, press the folder containing the site you want to visit. That date’s screen appears.

4

Safari Has a Good Memory Safari remembers the last search you performed. To clear a search, click the Clear button located at the right end of the Search bar.

5

240

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

6.

Press the site you want to visit. The site opens.

7.

Use the techniques you learned earlier in this chapter to view the content of the page.

6

Erasing the Past To clear your browsing history, press the Clear button at the bottom of any of the History screens. Press Clear History at the prompt, and it will be as if you’ve never been on the Web.

7

Saving and Organizing Bookmarks In addition to moving bookmarks from a computer onto iPhone, you can add new bookmarks to iPhone, and they’ll move onto the computer the next time you sync. You can organize bookmarks on iPhone, too.

It’s Not All Good Unfortunately, bookmarks that you create on iPhone are only useful on the computer to which they are copied, if you use Internet Explorer or Safari (Windows PCs), or Safari (Mac). If you use Firefox or another web browser, the bookmarks moved onto the computer from iPhone are of no value.

Browsing the Web on iPhone

241

Saving Bookmarks 1.

Move to a webpage that you want to save as a bookmark.

2.

Press the Action button. The Action menu appears.

3.

Press Add Bookmark. The Add Bookmark screen appears. The top field is the name of the bookmark. The middle field shows its URL. The lowest field shows where the bookmark will be stored.

4.

Edit the bookmark’s name as needed, or to erase the current name and start over, press the Clear button. Then type the new name of the bookmark.

5.

Press Bookmarks. The Bookmarks screen appears. Starting at the top level, Bookmarks, you see all the folders on iPhone in which you can place the new bookmark.

Bookmarks Option? The location shown in the third bar is the last one in which you stored a bookmark. The first time you add a bookmark, this bar is called Bookmarks because that’s the default location. After you choose a different location, the bar is relabeled with that location’s name, which iPhone remembers the next time you add a new bookmark.

2

3

4

5

242

6.

7.

8.

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Scroll the screen to find the folder in which you want to place the new bookmark. You see folders nested within other folders to show you the hierarchical relationship between them. You can choose any folder on the screen in which to save the bookmark.

6

To choose a location for the new bookmark, press it. You return to the Add Bookmark screen, which shows the location you selected.

7

Press Save. The bookmark is created and saved in the location you specified. You can use the Bookmarks tool to move to it at any time.

8

Organizing Bookmarks 1.

2.

Press the Bookmarks button in Safari to move to the Bookmarks screen.

1

Press Edit. The unlock buttons appear next to the folders and bookmarks you can change; some folders, such as the History folder, can’t be changed. The order icons also appear on the right side of the screen.

2

Browsing the Web on iPhone

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Drag the order icon next to the bookmark or folder you want to move up or down the list up or down the screen. As you move between existing items, they slide apart to make room for the folder or bookmark you are dragging. The order of the items on the list is the order in which they appear on the Bookmarks screen.

3

To change the name of a folder or bookmark or the folder in which a bookmark is stored, press it. The Edit Bookmark or Edit Folder screen appears. Change the name in the name bar, which is at the top of the screen. If you want to change a bookmark’s URL, press the URL bar (which is the center bar when three bars appear) and make changes to the current URL. When you edit a folder, this bar doesn’t appear because it doesn’t apply to a folder. To change the location of the folder or bookmark, press the Location bar, which is labeled with the bookmark’s current location and is always the lowest bar on the screen. The Bookmarks screen appears.

243

4

5 6 7

244

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

8.

Scroll the list of bookmarks until you see the folder in which you want to place the selected bookmark or folder.

9.

Press the folder into which you want to move the folder or bookmark you selected. You move back to the Edit Folder or Edit Bookmark screen, and iPhone shows the new location of the bookmark or folder.

10. Press Bookmarks. You move back to the Bookmarks screen, and any changes you made, such as changing the name or location of a bookmark, are reflected.

8

9

10

11. To create a new folder, press New Folder. The Edit Folder screen appears. 12. Enter the name of the folder. 13. Press Bookmarks. The Bookmarks screen appears.

11

12 13

Browsing the Web on iPhone

245

14. Scroll the list of bookmarks until you see the folder in which you want to place the new folder. 15. Press the folder into which you want to move the new folder. You move back to the Edit Folder screen, which shows the new location of the folder. 16. Press Bookmarks to return to the list of available folders. 17. Drag the new folder so that it is listed in the order you want it to appear on the Bookmarks screen. 18. Place bookmarks or other folders within the new folder using the techniques you learned earlier to move folders and bookmarks around.

14

15

16

19. Press Done. iPhone saves your changes.

17

19

246

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Deleting Bookmarks or Folders 1.

Press the Bookmarks button in Safari to move to the Bookmarks screen.

2.

Press Edit. The unlock buttons appear next to the folders and bookmarks you can change; some folders, such as the History folder, can’t be changed. The order icons also appear.

3.

Scroll up and down the screen to find the bookmark or folder you want to delete.

4.

Press its unlock button. The Delete button appears.

5.

Press Delete. The folder or bookmark is deleted. Deleting a folder also deletes all the bookmarks it contains.

6.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to delete other folders or bookmarks.

7.

Press Done. You return to the Bookmarks screen.

3 4 5

7

Browsing the Web on iPhone

247

Creating a Bookmark on the Home Screen You can add a bookmark icon to the Home screen so that you can visit a webpage from there; this handy trick saves you several navigation moves to get into Safari and then move to the page you want via typing the URL or moving to the Bookmarks screen using a bookmark. 1.

Use Safari to move to a webpage to which you want to have easy access from the Home screen.

2.

Press the Action button.

3.

Press Add to Home Screen. The Add to Home screen appears.

4.

Edit the name of the icon on the Home screen.

5.

Press Add. You move to the Home screen and see the icon you added. You can return to the site at any time by pressing this icon.

1

2

3

5

4

248

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Location Is Everything Remember that you can move the icons on the Home screen to be where you want. See Chapter 11, “Customizing iPhone,” for details.

Custom webpage icon

Emailing a Link to a Webpage Sometimes when you visit a webpage, you want to share it with others. Using Safari, you can quickly email links to webpages you visit. 1.

Use Safari to move to a webpage to which you want to email a link.

2.

Press the Action button.

1

2

Browsing the Web on iPhone

3.

4.

Press Mail Link to this Page. A new email message is created, and the link to the webpage is inserted into the body. The subject of the message is the title of the webpage. Complete and send the email message. (See Chapter 5, “Emailing,” for all you need to know about using iPhone email.) When the recipient receives your message, he can visit the website by clicking the link.

3

4

249

250

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

Completing Web Forms

3

2

1

Just like web browsers on a computer, you can provide information through webpages in Safari by completing forms, such as to log in to your account on a website. 1.

Open Safari and move to a website containing a form.

2.

Zoom in on the fields you need to complete.

3.

Press in a field. The keyboard pops up.

4.

Enter the information in the field.

5.

Press Next. If there isn’t another field on the form, this button is disabled, so skip this step. If it is enabled, you move to the next field on the form.

6.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to complete all the fields on the form.

7.

Press Done. The keyboard closes, and you move back to the webpage.

8.

Press Submit, Go, Login, or other button to provide the form’s information to the website.

Those Wheels Keep On Spinnin’ When you have to make a selection on a form, such as a date, a selection wheel appears on iPhone’s screen. You can spin the wheel to enter the appropriate data into a field.

5

4

7

8

Browsing the Web on iPhone

Opening and Managing Multiple Webpages at the Same Time

251

1

Using Safari, you can open and work with multiple webpages at the same time. Some links on webpages open a new page, or you can open a new page manually at any time. 1.

Using Safari, open a webpage.

2.

Press the Page Manager button. The page manager appears.

2

Safari Keeps Working As you move to webpages, you can immediately press the Page Manager button to open more pages. Pages continue to load in the background as you move between the Page Manager and individual pages.

3.

4.

Press New Page. A new webpage opens. The counter on the Page Manager button increases by one to show you how many pages are open. Use Safari’s tools to move to another webpage. You can enter a URL, use a bookmark, perform a search, and so on.

5.

View and work with the webpage.

6.

Repeat steps 2 through 5 to open as many webpages as you want to see.

7.

Press the Page Manager button again. You see a thumbnail representation of each open webpage.

3 4

5

7

Number of pages open

252

Chapter 6

Surfing the Web

8.

To move between pages, drag your finger to the left or to the right until the page you want to view is in focus.

9.

To move to the page in focus, press it or press Done. You move to the webpage and can view it.

9

10. Press the Page Manager button. You move back to the Page Manager. 11. To close an open page, press its close button. The page closes and disappears from the Page Manager screen, and the counter is reduced by one.

8

Jump directly to a page by pressing its dot.

10 11

This page intentionally left blank

Communicate while on the move. Configure the sound you hear when new messages arrive.

In this chapter, you’ll explore the text messaging functionality that iPhone has to offer. The topics include the following: B B B B

Configuring the New Text Message sound Sending text messages Receiving and replying to text messages Working with text messages

7

Text Messaging Text messaging enables you to have conversations with other people and to communicate information quickly and easily. iPhone has the Short Message Service (SMS) application that you can use to send, receive, and converse via text messages. You can maintain any number of conversations with other people at the same time, and iPhone lets you know whenever you receive a new message. iPhone’s text messages are sent via the cell network based on telephone numbers. You can send text messages to and receive messages from anyone who has a cell phone capable of text messaging (and most are these days).

256

Chapter 7

Text Messaging

It’s Not All Good There is one definite and another potential problem with iPhone’s text messaging. The definite problem is that it is a lot more expensive than it should be on many networks. For example, under the current AT&T plan in the United States, you must pay $5 per month for 200 text messages (if you are a heavy user of text messaging, that isn’t very many messages), while for a FamilyTalk plan, unlimited text messaging is $30 per month, which is outrageous based on how little data is required to be communicated for text messages. If you don’t have any text messaging in your plan, it’s even worse at a cost of $.20 per message. (All these figures are for the AT&T network in the United States; if you use iPhone on a different network, you may have other text messaging options.) The potential problem depends on how much you use text messaging and the kind of features you need. Since iPhone was originally released, I’ve read and heard from iPhone users who tell me the text messaging capabilities provided by iPhone’s SMS application are a bit limited, and with the iPhone 2.0 software, these capabilities are not much improved. I think it does a reasonable job for short, brief messages that are meant to be very temporary; anything more complicated should be moved elsewhere, such as to email or a phone call. If you rely on text messaging as an important form of communication, I recommend that you explore an Internet-based text messaging application instead of iPhone’s cell phone-based SMS application. For example, at press time, you can download and use the AOL AIM instant messaging application for free. Because this uses the Internet for text chatting, there is no limit or cost to the number of messages you can send, and the AIM application has many more features than iPhone’s SMS application. Even better, you aren’t limited to chatting through cell phone applications; you can communicate with anyone who uses an AIM-compatible chat application on computers or other devices. For more information about finding, installing, and using iPhone applications, see Chapter 10,“Working with iPhone Applications.”

Configuring the New Text Message Sound

257

Configuring the New Text Message Sound When you receive a new text message, iPhone plays an alert tone so that you know a message has arrived. You can choose the alert sound you want to hear or disable this sound if you don’t want to hear it.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Home screen and press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

2.

Press Sounds. The Sounds screen appears.

3.

Press New Text Message. The New Text Message screen appears.

4.

Press the sound you want to hear when a new message arrives. You hear the sound you selected; if you don’t want any sound to play, press None.

2

3

Whenever a new text message arrives, you’ll hear the sound you selected (unless you selected None, in which case new messages will arrive with no audio fanfare, or if you have muted iPhone).

4

258

Chapter 7

Text Messaging

Sending Text Messages You can send text messages by entering a number manually or by choosing a contact from your contacts list. (For help configuring your contacts, see Chapter 2,“Managing Contacts.”)

>>>step-by-step 1.

2.

On the Home screen, press SMS. The Text Messages screen appears.

1

Press New Message. The New Message screen appears.

Change Your Mind? To remove a contact from the To box, press it once so it becomes highlighted in blue and then press the Delete key on the keyboard.

2

Sending Text Messages

3.

If the person to whom you are sending the message is not in your contacts, skip to step 8. If the person is in your contacts, press Add Contact. The All Contacts screen appears.

4.

Scroll on the screen to find the contact to whom you want to send a message. (Remember that you can press a letter on the index to quickly jump to a section of the contacts list.)

5.

Press the contact to whom you want to send the message. If the person you select has more than one phone number, the contact’s Info screen opens so you can choose the number to which you are going to send the message. If there is only one number for the contact, that number is used for the new message automatically, you return to the New Message screen where you see the contact’s name in the To field, the cursor is placed in the Send box, and you can skip to step 10.

6.

If the contact has more than one number, press the number to which you want to send the text message. You return to the New Message screen; the name of the contact you selected is shown in the To field, and the cursor is moved into the Send box. Skip to step 10.

259

3

4 5

6

260

Chapter 7

Text Messaging

7.

Press the To field.

8.

Enter the number to which you want to send the text message. As you type, iPhone tries to match the number you type to someone on your contacts list; it presents a list of numbers and contacts that it thinks matches; press one of these to select it. If the number isn’t found, keep entering it until it’s complete.

9.

7

9 8

Press the Send bar. The cursor moves into it, the keyboard appears, and if the number you entered matches a number in your contacts, the contact’s name replaces the number in the To field. If not, the number remains as you entered it.

10. If you want to send the message to more than one recipient, press to the right of the current recipient and use steps 2 through 9 to enter the delivery information, either by selecting a contact or entering a phone number. As you add recipients, they appear in the To field. 11. Type the message you want to send in the Send bar (if the cursor isn’t there already, press in the Send bar to move it there before you type).

10

11

12

Who you sent it to

12. Press Send. The Send status bar appears as the message is sent. When it’s complete, you see a new conversation screen if the message was not sent to someone you were previously text messaging with, or you move back to the existing conversation screen if you already have a text message conversation going with the recipient.

When you sent it The message you sent

Receiving and Replying to Text Messages

261

Receiving and Replying to Text Messages When you receive a new text message, you hear the new message sound (unless you’ve turned it off or muted iPhone) and see the new message window on iPhone’s screen.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Read the message.

2.

Press Close if you want to ignore the message for now; you can always read it later. (See the section Working with Text Messages in this chapter for details.) Skip the rest of these steps.

3.

To reply to the message, press Reply. You move to the conversation screen, and the Send bar appears.

Who message is from

Message content

Press to close

Press to reply

Messages While iPhone Sleeps If you receive a text message while iPhone is sleeping, you hear the new text message alert sound, and iPhone wakes up temporarily. The message text, without any controls, appears on the Locked iPhone screen. If you don’t do anything about it, the message stays on the screen for a few seconds and then disappears while iPhone returns to its slumber.

262

Chapter 7

Text Messaging

4.

Press the Send bar.

5.

Type your reply.

6.

Press Send. The message is sent, and you see your message added to the conversation.

7.

If the person replies to you immediately, read the reply on the left side of the screen under your message.

8.

Repeat steps 5 through 7 to reply and read replies to you.

9.

Press Messages. You move to the Text Message screen on which you see all the text message conversations in progress.

4 5

6

7

Working with Text Messages As you send and receive messages, the interaction you have with each person becomes a separate text conversation, consisting of all the messages that have gone back and forth. You manage these conversations from the Text Messages screen.

Working with Text Messages

263

>>>step-by-step Conversing in Text You use the SMS application to manage your text messages. 1.

On the Home screen, press SMS. The Text Messages screen appears. On this screen, you see each conversation you have going. The name of the conversation is the name of the person associated with it. If a person can’t be associated with it, you see the number you are conversing with. If the message is such that you can’t reply to it (for example, when you request information about your AT&T account), you see a number of some sort.

1

Person with whom you’re conversing

When the last message was received

How Many Messages Do I Have? As you receive new text messages, a red circle on the SMS button on the Home screen indicates the number of new messages you have received. When you read a new message, this number is reduced so that it always indicates how many messages you’ve received but not read.

2.

Scroll the list to see all the conversations you have on-going.

3.

Press a conversation you want to read or reply to. The conversation screen appears; the name of the screen is the person with whom you are conversing—or her number if she isn’t in your contacts list.

2

Last message in the conversation

3

264

4.

Chapter 7

Text Messaging

Read the messages in the conversation. Your messages are on the right side of the screen in green, whereas the other person’s are on the left in gray. Messages are organized so that the newest message is at the bottom of the screen.

5.

Scroll the conversation screen to see all the messages it contains.

6.

If you don’t want to add to the conversation, skip to step 10. To add a new message to the conversation, press the Send bar. The keyboard appears.

7.

Type your message.

8.

Press Send. The message is sent, and you see your message added to the conversation.

9.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 as long as you want to keep conversing.

5 4

6

7

8

Working with Text Messages

10.

Scroll to the top of the screen.

11.

To call the person with whom you’re conversing, press Call.

12. 13.

265

13 11

To see the person’s contact information, press Contact Info.

12 10

When you’re done, press Messages. You return to the Text Messages screen and see the most recent message in the conversation shown with the date and time it was sent.

Clearing a Conversation Old text conversations never die, nor do they fade away. All the messages you receive from a person stay in the same conversation. Over time, you can build up a lot of messages in one conversation. When a conversation gets too long, you can clear it. 1.

Move to a conversation containing an abundance of messages.

2.

Press Clear.

3.

Press Clear Conversation at the prompt. All the messages are removed from the conversation, but the conversation itself remains. The next time you get a message from the same person, it will be added to the existing conversation.

1

2

3

266

Chapter 7

Text Messaging

Deleting a Conversation If a conversation’s time has come, you can delete it. 1.

Move to the Text Messages screen.

2.

Press Edit. Unlock buttons appear next to each conversation.

3.

Press the Unlock button next to the conversation you want to delete. The Delete button appears.

4.

Press Delete. The conversation is removed.

5.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to remove more conversations.

6.

When you’ve deleted all you want, press Done. You return to the Text Messages screen.

A Faster Way Another way to delete a conversation is to drag your finger over it to the left or right. The Delete button appears. Press the Delete button to delete the conversation.

1 2

3 4

6

This page intentionally left blank

Press here to see where you’re supposed to be and when you’re supposed to be there.

Go here to get all the time you need.

Press here to configure time and date settings.

In this chapter, you’ll explore all the time and calendar functionality that iPhone has to offer. Topics include the following: B Configuring iPhone’s date, time, and calendar settings

B Using iPhone as a clock B Working with calendars

8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar When it comes to time management, iPhone is definitely your friend. On iPhone, you can have multiple clocks for various locations, and you can have various alarms set on each one. Using iPhone’s Calendar, you can view calendars that have been synchronized with your computer’s calendar using MobileMe and applications such as Outlook on Windows PCs or iCal on Macs; of course, you can also make changes to your calendar on iPhone, and they’ll move back to your computer so you have consistent calendar information no matter what device you use.

270

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Configuring iPhone’s Date, Time, and Calendar Settings You should configure a few time and date settings before you start using iPhone to manage your time.

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings.

2.

Press General.

3.

Scroll down the screen and press Date & Time. The Date & Time screen appears.

4.

To have iPhone display time on a 24-hour clock, press the 24-Hour Time OFF button, which becomes ON to show you that iPhone is now showing time on a 24-hour scale. To have iPhone use a 12-hour clock, press ON to turn off 24-hour time again.

5.

If you don’t want iPhone to set its time automatically using its cellular network time (in other words, you want to manage iPhone’s time manually), press ON next to Set Automatically. The status becomes OFF, and two additional options appear; follow steps 6 through 18 to set those options or skip to step 19 if you leave the setting for time to be automatically.

6.

2

3

4 5

Press Time Zone. The Time Zone screen appears.

6

Configuring iPhone’s Date, Time, and Calendar Settings

7.

Type the name of the city that you want to use to set iPhone’s time zone. As you type, iPhone lists the cities that match your search.

8.

When the city you want to use appears on the list, press it. You move back to the Date & Time screen, which shows the city you selected in the Time Zone field.

9.

Press Set Date & Time. The Date & Time screen appears.

271

7 8

10. Press the date button. The date selection wheel appears. 11. Drag up and down on the month wheel until the center bar shows the month you want to set. 12. Drag up and down on the date wheel until the correct day of the month is shown in the center bar. 13. Scroll and select the year in the same way.

9

14. Press the time button. The time selection wheel appears.

10 14 12 13 11

272

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

15. Scroll the hour wheel until the center bar shows the hour you want to set.

18

16. Use the minutes wheel to select the minutes you want to set, as shown in the center bar.

15

17. Press AM or PM. 18. Press Date & Time. You move back to the Date & Time screen.

16

19. Press General. 20. Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

17

21. Scroll down until you see the Calendar section. 22. If you don’t want to be alerted when you receive invitations to an event, press ON next to New Invitation Events. Its status becomes OFF to show you that you won’t see these alerts. To be alerted again, press OFF so the status becomes ON. 23. To set the period of time over which past events are synced, press Sync. You move to the Sync screen.

19

20

21

22 23

Configuring iPhone’s Date, Time, and Calendar Settings

24.

Press the amount of time you want events to be synced or press All Events to have all events synced, regardless of their age.

25.

Press Mail….

26.

Press Time Zone Support.

273

25 24

26

It’s Not All Good The Time Zone Support feature is a bit confusing. If Time Zone Support is on, iPhone displays event times according to the time zone you select rather than your current location. As an example, if you choose Los Angeles as your time zone, events always show based on the time and date in Los Angeles no matter where you are; if you’ve set a meeting for 10 a.m., it is set for 10 a.m. Los Angeles time regardless of the time zone in which iPhone is located. If Time Zone Support is off, iPhone automatically shifts the times and dates of events to match the time zone of your current location.Your Los Angeles 10 a.m. meeting shows as a 1 p.m. meeting if you are in New York or 12 p.m. if you happen to be in Chicago.While this seems like it would be better because events would be shown in your current time zone, it isn’t always. For example, if you scheduled an airplane flight while in one time zone, when Time Zone Support is on, the time of the flight shifts according to the time zone you are in. But, the time of the flight is scheduled according to the time zone from which the flight originates, so if the departure time changes because of your changing time zones, it can be confusing. In any case, you need to be aware of the time zone you are using on your calendars (the one you select if Time Zone Support is on or the time zone of your current location if it is off) and the time zone with which events are associated.With some calendar applications (such as iCal), you can associate an event with a specific time zone when you schedule it.This is helpful because the event should be shown at the proper time regardless of the Time Zone Support setting on iPhone.

274

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

27. To have iPhone display meeting and event times on its calendar based on your current location, press Time Zone Support ON; it becomes OFF to show you that time zone support is disabled. Skip to step 31.

27 28

28. If you leave Time Zone Support ON, press Time Zone. The Time Zone screen appears. 29. Type the name of the city that you want to use to set the time zone. As you type, iPhone lists the cities that match your search.

29

30

30. When the city you want to use appears on the list, press it. You move back to the Time Zone Support screen and the city you selected is shown. 31. Press Mail…. 32. Press Default Calendar.

31

32

Using iPhone as a Clock

33.

Press the calendar that you want to be the default, meaning the one that is selected unless you specifically choose a different one.

34.

Press Mail….

35.

Press Settings. You move back to the Settings screen and are ready to start using iPhone to manage time and dates.

275

34

33

Using iPhone as a Clock iPhone is quite a powerful clock. In addition to showing you the time and date where you are currently located (and if you travel a lot as I do, this isn’t always obvious), you can set clocks for a variety of locations and set multiple alarms. With iPhone, you might never need a watch or bedside clock again.

Keeping Up with the Time In the previous section, you learned how to configure iPhone to set its time automatically or allow you to set the time manually. If iPhone sets the time automatically, the current time and date of your location are always shown. If you set the time manually, iPhone continues to display the time and date based on the settings you configured. Unless you have a very specific reason for not wanting iPhone to keep its time and date set to the current cell network, you should leave the time to be set automatically. You can easily configure clocks to show you the current time in specific locations.

Telling Time with iPhone iPhone displays the current time at the top of most of its screens for easy viewing. When iPhone is locked and you press the Sleep/Wake button, iPhone shows the current time and date. If you don’t unlock iPhone, it goes to sleep again in a few seconds, making this a very easy way to check the current time without using much battery power.

276

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Using the Clock Application You can set iPhone to display a number of clocks with each clock having a specific time zone associated with it. This makes it possible to know the time in several locations at once. Even better, you can configure multiple alarms to remind you of important events, such as getting out of bed. The Clock also provides a basic but very serviceable stopwatch and timer.

>>>step-by-step Creating, Configuring, and Using Clocks 1.

On the Home screen, press Clock. The Clock screen appears.

Like Night and Day

1

Based on the associated time zone, a clock’s face is black if the current time is between sunset and sunrise (in other words, it’s dark there) or white if the time there is in daylight hours.

2.

3.

Press World Clock. The World Clock screen appears. You see a clock for each location you have configured.

City associated with a clock

3

To add a clock, press the Add button. The Select City screen appears.

2 Time and date in that city

Using iPhone as a Clock

4.

Type the name of the city with which the clock is associated; this determines the clock’s time zone. As you type, iPhone tries to match cities to what you are typing and presents a list of matching cities to you.

4

5

Missing City If iPhone can’t find the specific city you want, choose one in the same time zone.The city you select determines the time zone of the clock. However, there is an issue with the clock’s name, which is addressed in the It’s Not All Good section in this task.

277

6

5. Press the city you want to associate with the clock. You return to the World Clock screen, and the clock is created showing the current time in that city. 6. To remove a clock or to change the order in which they appear on the screen, press Edit. Unlock buttons appear to the left of each clock. 7. Press the clock’s Unlock button next to the one you want to delete. The Delete button appears.

7

278

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

8.

Press Delete. The clock is deleted.

9.

Repeat steps 7 and 8 until you’ve deleted all the clocks you no longer want to see.

10. Drag clocks up and down the screen by their list icons to reorganize them.

11

10 8

11. Press Done. 12. To see all your clocks, scroll up and down the screen.

12

It’s Not All Good Unfortunately, you can’t rename clocks to reflect the actual city in which you are interested. So if you can’t find the specific city you want when you set the time zone, make sure that you select one that you easily recognize as being in the same time zone as the city where you really want to know the time.

Using iPhone as a Clock

>>>step-by-step Setting and Using Alarms 1.

On the Home screen, press Clock. The Clock screen appears.

2.

Press Alarm. The Alarm screen appears. You see the currently set alarms, listed by their time, with the earlier alarms toward the top of the screen.

3.

To add an alarm, press Add. The Add Alarm screen appears.

4.

To configure the alarm to repeat, press Repeat; to set a one-time alarm, skip to step 8. The Repeat screen appears.

5.

Press the day of the week on which you want the alarm to repeat. It is marked with a check mark.

6.

Repeat step 5 as many times as you need. The most frequently an alarm can repeat is once each day of the week.

7.

Press Back. The Repeat option shows you the days you selected for the alarm to repeat.

Alarm time

279

3 Status

Alarm days

Alarm label

2

4

7

5 6

280

8.

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

To choose the alarm sound, press Sound. The Sound screen appears.

Silent Alarm

8

If you select the None sound, you won’t hear anything when the alarm goes off, but a visual alarm displays.

9.

Browse the list of available sounds.

10.

Press the sound you want to use for the alarm. You hear the sound, and it is marked with a check mark.

11.

After you have selected the sound you want to use, press Back. You move back to the Add Alarm screen, which shows the sound you selected.

12.

13.

To disable the Snooze function, press ON. The status becomes OFF. When an alarm sounds and you dismiss it, it won’t appear again. With Snooze set to ON, you can press Snooze to dismiss the alarm, and it returns at 10-minute increments until you dismiss it. To name the alarm, press Label (to leave the default label, which is “Alarm,” skip to step 17). The Label screen appears. The label is what appears on the screen when the alarm activates, so you might want to give it a meaningful label.

11

9

10

12 13

Using iPhone as a Clock

14.

To remove the current label, press the Clear button.

15.

Use the keyboard to create a label for the alarm.

16.

Press Back. You return to the Add Alarm screen, which shows the label you created.

281

16

14

15

Alarming Volume The ringer volume setting determines an alarm’s volume. As you probably noticed, alarms use the same sounds as the ringer, so this makes sense. 17. Scroll the hour wheel until you see the hour you want to set in the center bar.

20

18. Scroll the minute wheel until you see the minute you want to set in the center bar.

17

19. Press AM or PM. 20. Press Save. You return to the Alarm screen, which now shows the new alarm you set. When the appointed time arrives, the alarm sounds and displays on the screen (or just displays on the screen if it is a silent alarm).

How iPhone Alarms Are Like Those on Bedside Clocks You can’t set an alarm for a specific date; they are set only by day of the week, just like a bedside alarm clock. To set alarm for a specific date, configure an event on the calendar and associate an alarm with that event. You’ll learn about working with calendar events later in this chapter.

18

19

282

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Changing Alarms

2

1

You can change existing alarms in several ways. 1.

Move to the Alarm screen.

2.

Press Edit. Unlock buttons appear next to each alarm.

3.

To delete an alarm, press its Unlock button. The Delete button appears.

4.

Press Delete. The alarm is deleted.

5.

To change an alarm, press it. The Edit Alarm screen appears.

3

4 5

Using iPhone as a Clock

6.

Use the controls on the Edit Alarm screen to make changes to the alarm. These work just as they do when you create an alarm. (See the previous task, Setting and Using Alarms, for details.)

7.

Press Save. The alarm is changed, and you return to the Alarm screen.

8.

To disable an alarm, press ON. Its status becomes OFF, and it is no longer active.

9.

To enable an alarm, press OFF. Its status becomes ON, and it sounds and appears at the appropriate times.

Not Dismissed So Easily When you dismiss an alarm, it isn’t deleted, but its status is set to OFF. To re-enable the alarm, move to the Alarm screen and press its OFF button. The status becomes ON, and the alarm activates at the next appropriate time.

283

7 6

8

9

284

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Managing Alarms When at least one alarm is active, you see the Alarm Clock icon in the upper right corner of the screen next to the Battery icon. When an alarm triggers, you see an onscreen message and hear the sound associated with it. If the alarm is snooze-enabled, press Snooze to dismiss it; it returns in 10 minutes. To dismiss the alarm, press OK. At least one alarm is active.

Press to Snooze.

Press to dismiss.

You can also dismiss an alarm by pressing the Sleep/Wake button.

>>>step-by-step Using iPhone as a Stopwatch 1.

On the Home screen, press Clock. The Clock screen appears.

2.

Press Stopwatch. The Stopwatch screen appears.

3.

Press Start. The stopwatch starts.

3

2

Using iPhone as a Clock

4.

To set a lap time, press Lap. The lap time appears on the list below the stopwatch.

5.

To stop the time, press Stop. The time stops.

6.

Browse the lap times you’ve captured.

7.

To restart the stopwatch, press Start.

8.

To start a new stopwatch session, press Reset.The current time is set to 00:00.0, and all lap times are removed.

285

5

4

7

8

Not Seen but Heard The alarm, stopwatch, and timer continue to work behind the scenes as you move to other screens. So you don’t need to be viewing the Timer screen to use the timer, as an example. Set the timer and then keep doing whatever you need to be doing.When something happens you need to know about, iPhone lets you know with onscreen messages or sounds.

6

Using iPhone as a Timer 1.

On the Home screen, press Clock. The Clock screen appears.

2.

Press Timer. The Timer screen appears.

3.

Drag the hour wheel up or down until the center bar shows the hour you want to set on the timer; you can select a timer up to 23 hours.

4.

Drag the minute wheel up or down until the center bar shows the minute you want to set on the timer.

5.

Press When Timer Ends. The When Timer Ends screen appears.

3 4

5

2

286

6.

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Browse the action and sounds available. At the top of the screen, you see the Sleep iPod command which shuts down iPod actions when the timer expires. Under that, you see a collection of your custom ringtones. In the Standard section, you see iPhone’s standard sounds.

7.

Press the action or sound you want to associate with the timer. What you select is marked with a check mark. Any sound you select plays.

8.

Press Set. You return to the Timer screen, which shows the sound or action you selected.

9.

Press Start. The countdown begins. When the countdown ends, an onscreen message appears, and the sound you selected plays or iPod functions go to sleep, if you selected that action.

8 7

6

9

10. To change the sound or action while the timer is counting down, press When Timer Ends and use steps 6 through 8 to choose a different sound or action. 11. To stop the timer, press Cancel. The timer stops, but your most recent settings remain.

10 11

Working with Calendars

287

Press to stop the timer’s alert.

When a timer gets to 0, you see an onscreen message and hear the sound associated with the timer. (If the timer has the Sleep iPod action, you don’t hear or see anything, but any music or video playing stops.)

Sleep iPhone Sleep If you choose the Sleep iPod action, when the timer ends, any iPod functions pause. This is useful when you want music or video to stop playing after a specific time. This works like a sleep timer on a TV.

Working with Calendars iPhone can help you manage your calendar. In most cases, you’ll be moving calendar information from a computer onto iPhone, but you can add events directly to iPhone’s calendar. (And when you do, they move to the computer’s calendar the next time it syncs.) There are a number of ways to sync iPhone’s calendar to calendars on your computers. You can use MobileMe on a Windows PC or on a Mac to move calendar information to the MobileMe cloud from where it can be pushed onto iPhone through your MobileMe account. You can also configure an Exchange email account on iPhone and include calendar information in the sync with that account. Or, you can use the standard iTunes sync process to move calendar information between a Windows PC and iPhone or between a Mac and iPhone. Each of these methods is explained in the following sections.

Go Wireless Using MobileMe or an Exchange account are the better ways to sync calendar information because you don’t have to connect iPhone to a computer.

288

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

It’s Not All Good If you don’t use Outlook or iCal, you’re out of luck on the calendar syncing front. If you don’t use one of these calendar applications but you can access your calendar on the Web, access it using the Safari web browser instead of iPhone’s Calendar application.

>>>step-by-step Syncing a Calendar with MobileMe on a Windows PC Make Me Mobile To use MobileMe for calendar syncing, you have to obtain a MobileMe account and configure syncing on your Windows PC. See the Prologue for details on MobileMe setup.

1.

Open the MobileMe control panel.

2.

Click the Sync tab.

3.

Check the Calendars check box.

4.

Choose Outlook on the Calendars drop-down list.

5.

Click OK. The control pane closes and Outlook calendar information is included in the next sync.

6.

Configure iPhone to get calendar information from your MobileMe account (see Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with a MobileMe or Exchange Account later in this section).

3

2

1

5

4

Working with Calendars

289

Syncing a Calendar with MobileMe on a Mac MobileMe To use MobileMe for calendar syncing, you have to obtain a MobileMe account and configure syncing on your Mac. See the Prologue for details on MobileMe setup.

1.

Open the MobileMe pane of the System Preferences application.

2.

Click the Sync tab.

3.

Check the Calendars check box.

4.

Quit the System Preferences application. Calendar information is included in the next sync.

5.

Configure iPhone to get calendar information from your MobileMe account (see Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with a MobileMe or Exchange Account later in this section) .

2

3

1

290

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with a MobileMe or Exchange Account 1.

Configure the MobileMe or Exchange server account on iPhone (see Chapter 5,“Emailing,” for details).

2.

Move to the Settings screen.

3.

Press Mail, Contacts, Calendars.

4.

Press the account through which you want to get calendar information. You see its configuration screen.

5.

Ensure the Calendar status is ON; if not, press OFF so it becomes ON. Your calendars will be moved from the account onto iPhone.

6.

Press Mail….

7.

Repeat steps 5 through 6 to add calendars for your various accounts.

8.

Configure iPhone to get calendar information via push (see Configuring iPhone Push Calendar Syncing in the next section).

2

3

4

6

5

Working with Calendars

291

Configuring iPhone Push Calendar Syncing You can configure your calendar information to be pushed from where it is managed, such as an Exchange server or MobileMe, onto iPhone whenever changes are made so that your calendar information is always current.The downside to this is that push uses more battery power; however, it is unlikely that your calendars change very frequently so having push enabled for calendars doesn’t use as much power as push email does. 1.

Move to the Settings screen.

2.

Press Fetch New Data.

3.

If the status of Push isn’t ON, press OFF so it becomes ON.

4.

Scroll down until you see the Advanced command.

1

2

Saving Power Push syncing causes iPhone to use more power, which means your battery life is shorter. If your calendar or other information doesn’t change that fast, use the Fetch option instead and set a relatively long time between fetches. To do this, move to the Fetch New Data screen and turn Push to OFF. Then press the amount of time between fetches on the list of times, such as Hourly. iPhone will fetch the information only at the appointed times, which saves battery power compared to push. Choose Manually if you want to only fetch information at your command.

3

4

292

5.

6.

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Press Advanced. You see the Advanced screen that shows the list of all your accounts. Under each account, you see the information that is currently being moved to iPhone. Along the right edge of the table, you see how the information is being moved, either Push or Manual.

5

Press the account you want to configure.

7.

Press Push to have the account’s information pushed onto iPhone or Manual to use the Fetch schedule instead.

8.

Press Advanced.

9.

Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each account.

Multiple Calendar Syncs Make sure you enable calendar syncing from the same source only once or you’ll end up with the same calendar’s information on iPhone multiple times, which can be confusing. For example, if you use Outlook on a PC and have an Exchange account, you don’t want to sync calendar information both via MobileMe and Exchange because you’ll get the same calendar information twice. Disable Calendar syncing using the MobileMe control panel and only the information you get via Exchange will be moved onto iPhone.

6

8 7

Working with Calendars

293

Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with Outlook on Windows PCs 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes.

2.

Click the Info tab.

3.

Scroll until you see the Calendars section.

4.

Check Sync calendars from and choose Outlook on the pop-up menu if it isn’t selected by default.

5.

If you want to prevent older events from being synced, check the Do not sync events older than check box and enter the number of days in the box. Any events older than the number of days you enter are ignored during syncs.

6.

Click Apply. The calendar information you selected is moved onto iPhone. Each time you sync iPhone (if you allow automatic sync, this happens every time you connect iPhone to your computer), iTunes moves changes to your Outlook calendar onto iPhone’s calendar and changes you made on iPhone’s calendar to your Outlook calendar.

Can’t Sync? If you are syncing calendar information via MobileMe or Exchange, the Calendar section on the Info tab is disabled because you are already syncing this information.

2

3

4

5

6

294

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Syncing iPhone’s Calendar with iCal on Macs 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes.

2.

Click the Info tab.

3.

Scroll down until you see the Calendars section.

4.

Check Sync iCal calendars.

5.

If you want all the calendars you access in iCal to move onto iPhone, click the All calendars radio button and skip to step 8.

6.

If you want only selected calendars to move onto iPhone, click the Selected calendars radio button.

7.

Check the check box next to each calendar that you want to sync on iPhone.

8.

If you want to prevent older events from syncing, check the Do not sync events older than check box and enter the number of days in the box.

9.

Click Apply. The calendar information you selected moves onto iPhone. Each time you sync iPhone, iTunes moves the changes you’ve made to your iCal calendar since the last sync onto iPhone’s calendar, and any changes that you made on iPhone’s calendar move to your iCal calendar.

5

6

4

7

8

Working with Calendars

295

Using iPhone’s Calendar iPhone’s Calendar application enables you to view calendar information and add events to or change events on your calendar. When you sync iPhone’s calendar, any changes you make are moved back to the calendar in other locations, such as to the MobileMe cloud, your Outlook calendar, or your iCal calendars.

1

Viewing Calendars You use the Calendar application to view time, and you can choose how you view it, such as by month, week, or day. 1.

2.

On the Home screen, press Calendar. What happens depends on the number of calendars you have on iPhone. If you have only one calendar, you move to that calendar, and you can skip the next step. In most cases, you’ll move to the All Calendars screen, showing all the calendars configured on iPhone. Press Calendars to move to the Calendars screen, on which you see a list of all your calendars, grouped by account. Press the specific calendar you want to view, press the All accountname, where accountname is the name of the account from which the calendars come, or press All Calendars at the top of the screen to see them all.

Account providing the calendar

Calendars available under the account

2

Color coding

296

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

Dots indicate dates with events. 3.

Press Month. The Month view appears.

4.

Press a date in which you are interested. It becomes highlighted in blue, and the event list shows the events associated with that date.

5.

Scroll the list of events.

6.

To see detailed information for an event, press it. The Event screen appears.

7.

Read information about the event; scroll down to see all of it if needed.

8.

9.

To change the event, press Edit and follow steps 9 through 11. To delete an event, press Edit and follow steps 12 through 14. The Edit screen appears. Use the tools on this screen to make changes to the event. These work just like when you create a new event. (See Adding Events to the Calendar Manually for details.)

Today

4

5

Date in focus

6 Events on date in focus

3

8

7

10. When you finish making changes, press Done. You move back to the Event screen.

10

9

Working with Calendars

11.

Press the Return button, now labeled with the current month. You move back to the Calendar window.

12.

To remove an event from the calendar, scroll down until you see the Delete Event button.

13.

Press Delete Event. The confirmation box appears.

14.

Press Delete Event. The event is removed from the calendar, and you return to the Calendar screen.

15.

To move ahead to the next month, press Next.

16.

To move back to the previous month, press Back.

17.

To move the focus to today, press Today.

18.

Press List. The view changes to the List view showing each day in a heading with the events for that day immediately underneath the heading. At the top of the calendar, you see the calendar with which the events are associated.

297

11

12

13 14

16

15

17

18

298

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

19. Scroll the list of dates. 20. To view or change an event’s details, press it. The Event screen appears; this screen works just as it does when you access it from the Month view. (See steps 7 through 14 for details.)

20 19

21. Press Day. The Calendar changes to Day view. 22. Scroll up and down to see the entire day.

21

23. Press Back to move to the previous day. 24. Press Next to move to the next day. 25. To view or change an event’s details, press it. The Event screen appears; this screen works just as it does when you access it from the Month view. (See steps 7 through 14 for details.)

23

24

25 22

Working with Calendars

Adding Events to the Calendar Manually

1

299

2

When you are on the move, you can add events to iPhone calendars. 1.

View the calendar to which you want to add an event; you can add events to a calendar in any view.

2.

Press the Add button. The Add Event screen appears.

3.

Press Title Location. The Title & Location screen appears.

4.

With the cursor in the Title bar, type the title of the event.

5.

Press the Location bar and type the location of the event.

6.

Press Save. You move back to the Add Event screen.

7.

3

6

Press Starts Ends. The Start & End screen appears.

4 5

7

300

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

8.

Press Starts. It is highlighted in blue.

9.

To make the event an all day event, press All-day OFF; it’s status becomes ON and the date selection wheels appear. Follow steps 10 through 16. To set a time for the event, leave the All-day status as OFF and complete steps 17 through 23.

15 8 13 9 11 14

10. Drag the month wheel until the event’s month is shown in the center bar. 11. Drag the date wheel to set the event’s date.

10

14

12

14

12. Drag the year wheel to set the year in which the event occurs. 13. Press Ends. 14. Use the month, date, and year wheels to set the end date for the event.

23

15. Press Save. You return to the Add Event screen and the event’s dates are set.

21

16. Skip to step 24. 17. Scroll the date wheel until the center bar shows the date of the event.

18 22

18. Scroll the hour wheel until the center bar shows the hour of the event. 19. Scroll the minute wheel until the center bar shows the minute of the event. 20. Press AM or PM. 21. Press Ends. It is highlighted in blue.

20 17

22

19

22

22

Working with Calendars

22.

Use the date, hour, and minute wheels and the AM/PM button to set the end time and date.

23.

Press Save. You move back to the Add Event screen.

24.

To make the event repeat, press Repeat and follow steps 25 through 30. (For a nonrepeating event, skip to step 31.) The Repeat Event screen appears.

25.

Press Save. You move back to the Add Event screen.

27.

Press End Repeat. The End Repeat screen appears.

28.

To have the event repeat ad infinitum, press Repeat Forever and skip to step 30.

29.

To set an end to the repetition, use the month, date, and year wheels.

30.

24

Press the period on which you want the event repeated, such as Every Day, Every Week, and so on.

26.

301

26

25

27

Press Save. You move back to the Add Event screen.

30

28

29

302

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

31. To set an alert for the event, press Alert. If you don’t want to set an alert, skip to step 37. The Event Alert screen appears.

31

32. Select when you want to see an alert for the event. 33. Press Save. You move back to the Add Event screen.

33

Alert, Alert! To hear a sound when an event alert occurs, open the Sounds screen (choose Home, Settings, Sounds), and ensure that ON appears next to Calendar Alerts. If OFF appears, press it to make event alarms audible as well as visual.

34.

To set a second alert, press Second Alert. The Event Alert screen appears.

35.

Select when you want to see a second alert for the event.

36.

Press Save. You move back to the Add Event screen.

37.

32

34

36

To change the calendar with which the event is associated, press Calendar; to leave the current calendar selected, skip to step 40.

35

37

Working with Calendars

38.

Press the calendar with which the event should be associated.

39.

Press Save.

303

39

Keeping in Sync When you sync an iPhone, information moves both ways. When you make a change to the calendar from the computer, the changes move to iPhone the next time you sync. Likewise, if you add or change events on iPhone, those changes move to the calendar on the computer during the next sync. Unfortunately, you can’t choose the alert sound for an event. All event alarms use the standard calendar event alarm sound.

40. Press Notes. The Notes screen appears.

38

40

42 41

41. Type information you want to associate with the event. 42. Press Save. You return to the Add Event screen. 43. Press Done. The event is added to the calendar. Any alarms trigger according to your settings.

43

304

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

It’s Not All Good The current version of iPhone’s email application can’t do anything with attachments that are event invitations (.ics files). That means when you receive an email invitation to an event, you can’t add it to iPhone’s calendar by opening the attachment (which is what should happen and what does happen when you use a computer email client). If the invitation is from an iCal user, you can see the event information in the subject line of the email message so you can create an event on your calendar manually, but invitations from other email applications don’t have this information so they are useless to you on iPhone. The only kind of events that come as invitations are meeting requests from Outlook that come in through an Exchange account. However, even these invitations don’t seem to maintain the appropriate status. When you accept an invitation in Outlook instead of iPhone, the status shown on iPhone is Maybe instead of Accepted. Hopefully, these issues will be resolved with a future iPhone software update, and all invitations will work like those via Exchange and the issues with event status will be solved. In the current version, working with invitations is very limited, and you’ll have to rely on your calendar applications on a computer to manage them properly.

Number of invitations

>>>step-by-step Adding Events to the Calendar by Accepting Invitations When someone invites you to an event, you receive a notification in the Calendar. You can accept invitations at which point the event is added to your calendar. Or, you can decline the event if you don’t want it added to your calendar. 1.

When you receive an invitation, you see an alert on the screen; press View to see the details or press Close if you don’t want to work with

1

Press to ignore.

Press to view event.

Working with Calendars

305

the event (the rest of these steps assume you press View). You also see an invitation counter over the Calendar icon. You see the Info screen that shows details for the event. 2. Scroll the event to see all of its details.

2

3. View details about whom the invitation is from and attendees by pressing their areas. You move to detail screens for each.

3

4. To configure an alarm for the event, press Alert and use the resulting Alert screen to choose an alert. 5. To choose the calendar on which the event should be shown, press Show in Calendar and on the resulting screen, press the appropriate calendar. 6. To add comments to the event, press Add Comments and use the Comments screen to enter text about the event. 7. Indicate what you want to do with the event by pressing Accept, Maybe, or Decline. If you accept the event or press Maybe, the event is added to the calendar with the status you indicated. If you decline, the event is not placed on a calendar and the recipient receives a notice that you have declined.

4 5 7

6

306

Chapter 8

Working with Date & Time and the Calendar

After you make a decision, you move to the Invitations screen, where you see the status of all the invitations you’ve received. Events you’ve accepted or declined appear briefly and then disappear as the appropriate action is taken (such as adding an event you’ve accepted to the calendar).

8

8. Press Done. You move to the calendar.

Managing Invitations You can use iPhone to view the various invitations with which you’ve worked, such as to see their status. 1.

Move into the Calendar.

2.

Press Invitations. You move to the Invitations screen where you see all the invitations you’ve received and indicated a Maybe response (invitations you’ve accepted or declined are removed from this list). (Remember that in the current version of iPhone’s software, a Maybe status might indicate that you’ve accepted the meeting in Outlook, so check your calendar before accepting it again).

3.

Press an invitation. You see its details.

4.

Work with the invitation using the steps in the previous section.

5

5.

Press Done. You return to the calendar.

3

1

2

Working with Calendars

307

Working with Event Alarms When an event’s alarm goes off, you see an onscreen alert and hear the calendar event sound (if it is enabled). Click View Event to view details on the Event screen or click Close to dismiss the alarm.

Press to dismiss the alarm.

Press to see the event.

If the event has a second alarm, it also goes off according to the schedule you set. Handle it the same as the first alarm.

View photos and slideshows.

Take photos.

Configure slideshow settings.

In this chapter, you’ll explore all the photo functionality that iPhone has to offer. Topics include the following: B B B B B

Taking photos with iPhone Moving photos from a computer onto iPhone Moving photos from email onto iPhone Viewing and working with photos on iPhone Moving photos from iPhone to a computer

9 3

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos Although it isn’t likely to replace your primary digital camera, iPhone’s built-in camera takes reasonable photos, especially given how easy the camera function is to use and the fact that you’ll likely have iPhone with you at all times. Whether you’ve taken them on iPhone or moved them from a computer onto iPhone, you can view your photos individually and as nice slideshows. If you decide some of the photos you’ve taken on iPhone are worthy of adding to your photo collection, you can move them from iPhone onto your computer. You can also move photos you receive via email into the iPhone photo album for viewing or for transferring to your computer.

Taking Photos with iPhone iPhone’s camera lens is located on the backside of iPhone in the upper-left corner. Using iPhone’s camera is just about as easy as it could be.

310

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

1

>>>step-by-step 1.

On the Home screen, press Camera. The Camera screen appears; initially it has a shutter, but after a few moments the window opens, and you start seeing through iPhone’s lens.

2.

Point the camera at your subject; iPhone is truly point and shoot. (You can’t make any adjustments even if you want to.)

3.

To capture a photo in landscape mode, rotate iPhone so that it’s horizontal.

4.

When the photo is properly framed, press the Camera button. iPhone snaps the photo, and the shutter closes while the photo is recorded in iPhone’s memory. When the shutter opens again, you’re ready to take the next photo.

5.

If you want to view the photos you’ve taken, press the Photos button. The Camera Roll screen appears.

Take More Photos To move back into camera mode when you are viewing a photo, press the Camera button located in the right corner of the screen.

2

5

4

Taking Photos with iPhone

6.

Press the photo you want to view. It appears on the screen with iPhone’s photo-viewing controls.

7.

Use the photo-viewing tools to view the photo (see Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone later in this chapter for the details).

8.

To delete a photo, press the Trash can and then press Delete Photo. iPhone deletes the photo, and you see the next photo in the album.

9.

To move back to the photos in the roll, press Camera Roll. You return to the Camera Roll screen.

311

6

9

10. Press the Camera button. iPhone moves back into camera mode.

7 8

10

312

11.

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

To take more photos, press the Camera button.

11

Sensitive, Isn’t It! The iPhone’s camera is pretty sensitive to movement, so if your hand moves while you are taking a photo, it’s likely to be blurry. Sometimes, part of the image will be in focus while part of it isn’t, so be sure to check the view before you capture a photo. If you are getting blurry photos, the problem is probably your hand moving while you are taking them.

Moving Photos from a Computer onto iPhone As you saw in the last section, iPhone is a great way to take and view your photos while you are on the go. In addition to taking photos to view them on iPhone, you can also move photos from a computer onto iPhone so that you can view them individually and as slideshows. As you might guess, the steps to move photos from a computer to iPhone are slightly different between Windows PCs and Macs. See the section that applies to your computer.

Syncing Photos It’s a fact that iPhone’s memory is somewhat limited, especially if you have a lot of music and video on it. During the sync process, photos take a back seat to other kinds of content, meaning that if there isn’t room on iPhone for everything you’ve selected for a sync, photos are skipped first. It’s likely that you won’t have enough memory on iPhone for all of your photos. Consider creating specific photo albums for the photos you want on iPhone and then choose to sync only those photo albums. Use the memory gauge at the bottom of the iTunes window to get an idea of how much room iPhone has.

Moving Photos from a Computer onto iPhone

>>>step-by-step Moving Photos from a Windows PC onto iPhone You can use iTunes to move photos you’re storing on your PC using Adobe Photoshop Album 2.0 or later or Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later onto iPhone. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes.

2.

Click the Photos tab.

3.

Check the Sync photos from check box.

4.

On the pop-up menu, choose the application containing the photos you want to move onto iPhone, such as Photoshop Elements.

5.

If you want all the photos in the selected source to be moved onto iPhone, click the All photos and albums radio button and skip to step 9.

6.

If you want only selected albums to be moved onto iPhone, click the Selected albums radio button.

7.

Check the check box next to each photo album that you want to sync with iPhone.

8.

Change the order in which albums appear by dragging them up and down the list. This changes the order in which they appear on iPhone.

8

4

3

5

6

7

2

313

314

9.

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

Click Apply. The photos you selected move onto iPhone. If you make changes to the photo albums or to the photos you selected, the updates move onto iPhone the next time you sync it. See the section Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone to learn how to view your photos on iPhone.

Other Sync Options If you choose My Pictures on the Sync photos from pop-up menu, you can move photos stored in your My Pictures folder onto iPhone. If you select Choose Folder, you are prompted to select a folder of photos that you want to move onto iPhone. Depending on the option you choose, you might or might not be able to select specific photo albums to move onto iPhone.

9

Moving Photos from a Computer onto iPhone

315

Moving Photos from iPhoto to iPhone iTunes is designed to work seamlessly with iPhoto. (If you don’t use iPhoto, you won’t be able to use iTunes to move photos onto iPhone. And if you don’t use iPhoto, why not?) You can move all your photos or selected photo albums from iPhoto to iPhone by using iTunes’ syncing. You can also move photos you’ve stored in a folder on your Mac almost as easily. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes.

2.

Click the Photos tab.

3.

Check the Sync photos from check box.

4.

On the pop-up menu, choose iPhoto.

5.

If you want all the photos in iPhoto to be moved onto iPhone, click the All photos and albums radio button and skip to step 10.

6.

If you want to move specific events (which are collections of photos based on when those photos were taken), click the middle radio button and choose All on the pop-up menu to move all events onto iPhone or choose the number of recent events you want to move, such as 3 most recent to move the most recent three events onto iPhone; skip to step 10.

7.

If you want only selected albums to move onto iPhone, click the Selected albums radio button.

8.

Check the check box next to each photo album that you want to sync on iPhone.

9.

Change the order in which albums appear by dragging them up and down the list.

5

3

6

2

4

9

7

8

316

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

10. Click Apply. The photos you selected move onto iPhone. If you make changes to the photo albums or to the photos in your iPhoto Library (if you can store all of them on iPhone), the updates move onto iPhone the next time you sync it. If there’s not enough memory to store the photos you selected, you’re warned; you’ll need to remove some of the photos from the sync or remove other kinds of content to make more room.

10

Other Sync Options If you choose Pictures on the Sync photos from pop-up menu, you can move photos stored in your Pictures folder onto iPhone. If you select Choose folder, you are prompted to select a folder of photos that you want to move onto iPhone. Depending on the option you choose, you might or might not be able to select specific collections of photos to move onto iPhone. For example, if you select a folder that contains other folders, you can select the contents of each folder individually (which is similar to selecting a specific photo album to sync).

Moving Photos from Email onto iPhone In Chapter 5,“Emailing,” you learned all about the great email capabilities of iPhone. When you receive email that has photo attachments, you can view those photos using iPhone’s email application. You can also move those photos from the email into iPhone’s Photo tool at which point you can view them or move them onto a computer just like photos you’ve taken with iPhone’s camera.

Moving Photos from Email onto iPhone

317

>>>step-by-step 1.

Open an email that has a photo as an attachment (see Chapter 5 for details).

2.

Press the photo to download it to iPhone. The photo downloads and is displayed on iPhone’s screen.

1

3. Press the Action button or press the photo itself.

Multiple Photos in an Email If an email includes more than one photo, each image appears as an icon in the email. To add one of the attached photos to iPhone, download it and use the Save Image command. To save more than one photo, download each photo you want to save on iPhoto; when you press the Action button, the Save command will be Save X Images where X is the number of photos you’ve downloaded in the email. Once you’ve downloaded more than one image in the email, you can save all of them or none of them; you can’t pick and choose which you want to save. Of course, it’s easy to delete any photos you don’t want to keep as you’ll learn later in this chapter.

Photo attachment

3 4.

Press Save Image. The image is saved in the Camera Roll album within the Photo application, which is the same place photos you take with iPhone’s camera are stored, where you can view it. The next time you sync iPhone with a computer, the photo is moved onto the computer.

4

>>> Go Further

318

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

iPHONE SCREENSHOTS There are times when it is very useful to be able to capture screen images of the iPhone’s screen (such as when you are writing a book about iPhone). iPhone includes a screen capture utility that you can use to take a picture of whatever is on iPhone’s screen at any point in time. When the screen you want to capture appears, hold the Home button down and press the Wake/Sleep button. The screen flashes white to indicate that the capture has been taken. The resulting image is stored in the Camera Roll album. You can view the captures you take, email them, or move them onto a computer as you can with other kinds of photos.

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone After you’ve loaded iPhone with great (and maybe a few not-so-great) photos, you can use the Photos application to view them individually and as slideshows. You can also use the photos on iPhone for a number of tasks, such as setting iPhone’s wallpaper or emailing them.

>>>step-by-step Viewing Photos Individually Any photo on iPhone, whether you’ve taken it with iPhone’s camera or moved it onto iPhone via a sync, can be viewed at any time. 1.

On the Home screen, press Photos. The Photo Albums screen appears. On this screen, you see various collections of photos. The Camera Roll contains all the photos you’ve taken on iPhone or only those you’ve taken since the last time you moved all its photos onto a computer and then deleted them from iPhone. The rest of the items

1

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

319

are photo albums or other collections that you’ve moved from a computer onto iPhone. 2.

Browse the screen until you see an album containing photos you want to view.

3.

Press the album you want to view. You see the preview screen for that album with a thumbnail for each photo it contains.

4.

2 3

To view a photo, press it. The photo display screen appears. When the photo first appears, the photo viewing controls appear on the screen. After a moment, they disappear.

4

320

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

5.

To view the photo in landscape orientation, rotate iPhone.

6.

Unpinch or double-press on the photo to zoom in.

7.

Pinch or double-press on the photo to zoom out if you are zoomed in.

8.

Drag on the photo to scroll in it if you are zoomed in.

9.

Press once to view the photo tools. The tool bars appear on the screen.

10.

Press Back or drag quickly to the right to view the previous photo in the album.

11.

Press Forward or drag quickly to the left to view the next photo in the album.

12. 13.

14.

Press Play to start a slideshow (more on this in the next section). Press the Action button. Choose the action you want to take; these are explained in the sections Using a Photo as Wallpaper, Emailing a Photo, Assigning a Photo to a Contact, and Sending a Photo to MobileMe later in this chapter. Press the Return button, which is labeled with the current photo album’s name. You move back to the photo album’s screen.

8

7

6

14

9 11 10

13

12

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

321

>>>step-by-step Viewing Photos as a Slideshow You can view photos in slideshows. Before you start watching your own slideshows, take a few moments to configure iPhone’s slideshow settings to set your slideshow preferences.

Configure Slideshow Settings 1.

On the Home screen, press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

2.

Scroll down until you see Photos.

3.

Press Photos. The Photos setting screen appears.

4.

Press Play Each Slide For.

1

2

3

4

322

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

5.

Press the amount of time you want each slide in a slideshow to appear on the screen.

6.

Press Photos.

7.

Press Transition.

8.

Press the transition you want to use when slides change.

9.

Press Photos.

6

5

10. To make slideshows repeat until you stop them, press Repeat OFF. Its status becomes ON to indicate that you have to stop slideshows manually. When the status is OFF, slideshows play through once and then stop. 11. To view photos in a random order in a slideshow, press Shuffle OFF. Its status becomes ON so that you know photos will appear in random order during slideshows. To have photos appear in the order they are in the selected album, press ON so that the status becomes OFF.

7

9 8

10

11

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

323

Watching Slideshows 1.

On the Home screen, press Photos. The Photo Albums screen appears.

2.

Browse the screen until you see an album containing photos you want to view in a slideshow.

3.

Press the album you want to view in a slideshow. The album’s preview screen appears.

4.

Press Play. The slideshow begins to play.

5.

To view the slideshow in landscape mode, rotate iPhone in the clockwise direction. The slideshow plays, each slide appearing on the screen for the length of time you set. The transition you selected is used to move between photos. If you set slideshows to repeat, the slideshow plays until you stop it; if not, it stops after each photo has been shown once.

1

2 3

4 6 6.

To pause the slideshow, press the screen. The photo controls appear, and the slideshow pauses at the current photo.

324

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

7.

Press Play to start the slideshow again. When the slideshow finishes, you return to the album’s preview screen.

8.

To pause a slideshow again, press the screen. The controls appear.

9.

To move ahead in the slideshow, press the Forward button; to move back, press the Back button.

10.

To perform various actions on a photo, such as using it as wallpaper, press the Action button. These are covered in the next section.

11.

When you’re done with the slideshow, press the return button, which is labeled with the album’s name. You move back to the album’s preview screen.

12.

Press Photo Albums. You move back to the Photo Albums screen.

7

11

9

8

12

It’s Not All Good Unfortunately, you can’t associate music with a slideshow so that the music plays automatically when you watch the slideshow. If you want to hear music while a slideshow plays, use the iPod functions to start the music and then move to and start the slideshow.

10

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

>>>step-by-step Deleting Photos from iPhone You can only delete photos in the Camera Roll album from iPhone. To remove photos that are loaded onto iPhone via syncing with a computer, you must change the sync settings so those photos are excluded and then resync. To delete a photo you’ve taken with iPhone’s camera, captured as a screenshot, or downloaded from email, take the following steps. 1.

Move to the Photos application and open the Camera Roll source.

2.

Press the photo you want to delete. It appears on the viewing screen.

3.

Press the Trash icon.

4.

Press Delete Photo. The Trash icon opens and “swallows” the photo, at which point it is deleted. You see the next photo in the Camera Roll source.

325

1

2

3

3

326

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

Using a Photo as Wallpaper iPhone’s wallpaper appears when you wake it up but before you unlock it. You can use any photo stored on iPhone to customize your wallpaper. 1.

View the photo you want to use as wallpaper.

2.

Press the Action button.

3.

Press Use As Wallpaper. The Move and Scale screen appears.

4.

Drag and pinch or unpinch the image until the part you want to use as wallpaper shows on the screen the way you want to see it.

5.

Press Set Wallpaper. The wallpaper is set, and you return to the photo.

6.

Press the Sleep/Wake button to put iPhone to sleep and lock it.

7.

Press the Sleep/Wake button again. You see your custom wallpaper.

1

2

3

4

5

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

327

Emailing a Photo You can email photos via iPhone to others. 1.

View the photo you want to send in an email.

2.

Press the Action button.

3.

Press Email Photo. A new email message is created, and the photo is added as an attachment.

4.

Use the email tools to address the email, add a subject, type the body, and send it. (See Chapter 5 for detailed information about using iPhone email.) After you send the email, you move back to the photo.

1

2

3

4

328

5.

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

When you finish viewing the photo, press the return button, which is labeled with the name of the album. You move back to the album’s preview screen.

5

Assigning a Photo to a Contact You can assign photos on iPhone to your contacts. When you assign a photo to a contact, you see that photo when the contact calls you, when you receive email from the contact, and so on. You can assign any photo to a contact, but you get the best results when you use a photo that you’ve taken with iPhone because it will scale to full screen when the person calls you; other kinds of photos appear as thumbnails instead. 1.

Take the photo you want to assign to a contact. If the photo you want to use already exists on iPhone, skip this step.

1

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

2.

3.

Move to the source containing the photo you want to assign to a contact; if you’re using a photo you’ve taken, move to the Camera Roll. Press the photo you want to associate with a contact. It appears on the viewing screen.

4.

Press the Action button.

5.

Press Assign To Contact. The All Contacts screen appears. (For more information on working with contacts, see Chapter 2,“Managing Contacts.”)

329

2

3

4

5

330

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

6.

Browse or search for the contact to which you want to add the photo.

7.

Press the contact with which you want to associate the photo. The Move and Scale screen appears.

8.

Drag and pinch or unpinch the image until the part you want to add to the contact shows on the screen the way you want to see it.

9.

Press Set Photo. The photo is saved to the contact; when iPhone interacts with that contact, such as when you receive a call, the photo is displayed on iPhone’s screen. You return to the photo.

6 7

8

Deleting Contact Photos When a photo is associated with a contact, even if you delete the original photo taken with iPhone, the photo remains with the contact. (You can only delete photos taken with iPhone; photos that are transferred from a computer must be removed from the sync to be removed from iPhone.) Contact photos are quite small, so don’t worry about them using lots of iPhone’s memory.

9

Viewing and Working with Photos on iPhone

Sending a Photo to MobileMe If you have a MobileMe membership, you can post photos from the iPhone directly to your MobileMe galleries on the Web, where they can be viewed or downloaded.

1 1.

View the photo you want to move to the Web.

2.

Press the Action button.

3.

Press Send to MobileMe. The MobileMe Albums screen appears. Here, you see all the albums you have on your MobileMe Gallery website.

4.

2

Press the album to which you want the photo posted. An email to your MobileMe site is created.

3

4

331

332

5.

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

Press Send. The photo is sent to your website where it is posted in the album you selected.

5

Moving Photos from iPhone to a Computer As you use iPhone for a camera or to take screenshots, you’re going to want to move some of the photos you capture to your computer. How you do this depends on the kind of computer and photo application you use.

>>>step-by-step Moving Photos from iPhone to a Windows PC How you move photos from iPhone to a Windows PC depends on the specific application you use to manage your digital photos. Most applications designed to import photos from a digital camera should also work with iPhone. One example is Adobe Photoshop Elements. 1.

Connect iPhone to the computer. If new photos are detected, the Apple iPhone dialog appears.

Moving Photos from iPhone to a Computer

2.

Select Photoshop Elements.

3.

Check the Always use this program for this action check box.

4.

Click OK. The Photoshop Elements Photo Downloader appears.

5.

To create subfolders for each photo session on iPhone, open the Create Subfolders menu and choose how you want to name the subfolders.

333

2 3

4

5

334

Chapter 9

Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos

6.

If you want to rename the files, use the Rename Files menu.

7.

Check the Open Organizer when Finished check box.

8.

Use the Delete Options menu to determine what happens to the photos on iPhone after they are imported. The best option is After Copying, Verify and Delete Originals because it frees up space on iPhone while ensuring the photos have been imported successfully.

9.

Click Get Photos. Photos move from iPhone into Photoshop Elements, and the application opens.

7

10. Use Photoshop Elements to work with the photos you imported.

6

9

10

8

Moving Photos from iPhone to a Computer

335

Moving Photos from iPhone to a Mac iPhone is designed to move its photos into your iPhoto Library easily. 1.

Connect iPhone to a Mac. iPhoto opens automatically and moves into Import mode. iPhone is selected as the import source. In the iPhoto window, you see thumbnails for images you’ve captured using iPhone’s camera (you only see empty boxes for screenshots), and at the bottom of the window, you see how many photos are available for import.

2.

Enter an event name for the photos you want to import in the Event Name field.

3.

Enter a description of the photos you want to import in the Description field.

4.

Click Import All. The photos are copied from iPhone into iPhoto.

5.

Click Delete Originals if you want to delete the photos from iPhone or Keep Originals if you want them to remain on iPhone.

6.

Use iPhoto to work with the photos you imported from iPhone.

2

3

5

4

iPhone applications

In this chapter, you’ll explore how to add and manage third-party applications and use one of the best default applications, Maps. The topics include the following: B Using iTunes to find and install iPhone applications B Using the App Store to find and install iPhone applications

B B B B

Using iPhone applications you install Maintaining iPhone applications

10

Removing applications from iPhone Finding your way with Maps

Working with iPhone Applications If you’ve read through this book to this point, you’ve already learned enough great iPhone tricks that you’re probably convinced iPhone is one of the most useful, not to mention one of the coolest, gadgets ever. Here’s where you get some icing on that nice iPhone cake. iPhone comes with a powerful set of applications that you can use out-of-the-box, such as Mail, Safari, Calendar, Contacts, and so on. However, these are really only the starting point for your iPhone; there are thousands of other applications that you can download and use. And any discussion of iPhone applications isn’t complete without including one of the most useful default applications, Maps.

338

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

Using iTunes to Find and Install iPhone Applications The iTunes Store has many applications that you can download and install on iPhone. Many of these are free, while others have a license fee (which you pay through your iTunes Store account). Downloading applications from the iTunes Store is similar to downloading audio and video content (that topic is covered in detail in Chapter 3,“Listening to Audio and Watching Video”). Like moving other kinds of content onto iPhone from the iTunes Store, there are two steps to this process. The first is to download applications to your iTunes Library. The second is to move those applications onto iPhone by syncing it with your computer.

>>>step-by-step Downloading Applications from the iTunes Store

1

2

You can use the iTunes Store to browse for and download applications. 1.

Open iTunes and select iTunes Store on the Source list.

2.

In the iTunes Store section, click App Store. You move to the App Store Home page. You can click the various links you see to find applications, or you can browse for applications using the Categories section. The rest of these steps demonstrate using the Categories section.

3.

Click the category of application in which you are interested, such as Social Networking. The applications within that category appear. For each application, you see its name, category, release date, and cost.

3

Using iTunes to Find and Install iPhone Applications

4.

Click the page forward or page back buttons to move through other pages within the category you are browsing.

5.

When you find an application in which you are interested, click its icon. You move to the application’s description screen, where you can read about the application and look at screenshots.

6.

When you’re ready to download the application, click the Get App button if it is a free application or the Buy App button if it has a license fee.

7.

If you aren’t signed into your iTunes Store account, do so at the prompt by entering your Apple ID and password (or AOL screen name and password) and then clicking Get. The application is downloaded to your iTunes Library. (You can view the applications you have downloaded by clicking Applications on the Source list.)

4

5

6

Just Download It You don’t have to view an application’s details to download it. Just click the Get App or Buy App button next to the application’s icon while you are browsing to start the download process.

7

339

340

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

Searching for Apps in all the Right Places You can also search for iPhone applications. Click the Power Search link located on the top, right side of the iTunes Store Home page. Choose Applications on the Power Search drop-down list and then enter a title or description, developer name, or category. On the Device Compatibility drop-down list, choose iPhone. If you want to limit the results to include only free applications, check the Search for free applications check box. Click Search. Any applications that meet your criteria are shown.

>>>step-by-step Moving Applications from Your Library onto iPhone After applications have been downloaded, you can move them onto iPhone. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer and select it on the Source list.

2.

Click the Applications tab.

3.

Check the Sync applications check box.

4.

To move all the applications you’ve downloaded onto iPhone, click all applications and skip to step 7.

5.

To move just some of your applications onto iPhone, click Selected applications.

6.

Check the check box next to each application you want to move onto iPhone.

7.

Click Apply. The applications you selected are copied onto iPhone. If you selected All applications, each time you sync, all your applications are moved onto iPhone. If you chose Selected applications instead, you’ll need to repeat these steps when you download a new application and want to move it onto iPhone.

5

1

4

3

6

7

Using the App Store to Find and Install iPhone Applications

341

Using the App Store to Find and Install iPhone Applications The App Store, which is an application in itself, enables you to find applications and download them directly from the iTunes Store onto iPhone.

Connections To use the App Store, iPhone needs to be connected to the Internet with Wi-Fi or 3G. For best results, use the App Store when you are on a Wi-Fi network.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Home screen.

2.

Press App Store. You move into the App Store. At the bottom of the screen, you see several buttons you can use to find applications in different ways.

•

The Featured button takes you to applications that are being featured in the iTunes Store.

•

The Categories button shows you various categories of applications that you can browse (this works very similarly to browsing categories in the iTunes Store).

•

Top 25 takes you to a list of the top 25 iPhone applications. This tool has two tabs: Top Paid shows you the top applications for which you have to pay a license fee, while Top Free shows you a similar list containing only free applications.

•

The Search button enables you to search for applications. The rest of these steps show you how to browse by category; the other options are similar.

2

342

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

3.

Press Categories. You see a list of categories.

4.

Scroll the list until you see a category of interest.

5.

Press the category in which you are interested. You see the applications in that category. For each application, you see its icon, developer, name, user ranking, and its cost (a price or Free).

6.

Scroll the list of applications in the category.

7.

Press the application in which you are interested. You move to the application’s Info screen.

8.

Look at the application’s user rating, read the application’s description, and look at any screenshots.

9.

To read reviews, scroll down the screen.

4

5 3

6 7

8

9

Using the App Store to Find and Install iPhone Applications

10.

343

Press Reviews. You move to the application’s reviews screen where you see user reviews for the application.

Make Your Voice Known After you have used an application, you can add your own review by moving back to its Info screen and clicking the Add button. Press Write a Review. You move to the Submit Review screen where you have to enter your iTunes Store account information before you can write and submit a review.

11. Scroll the screen to read all reviews.

10

Add your review.

12 11

12. Press Info. You move back to the Info screen. 13. Scroll to the top of the screen. 14. To download the application, press FREE if it is a free application or press the price to download the application if it has a license fee. The button becomes Install if it is a free application or Buy Now if it has a license fee.

Gotta Share? If you decide an application is one someone you know should know about, move to the application’s Info screen and press Tell a Friend. An email message is created with a link to the application. Complete and send the email (see Chapter 5,“Emailing,” for help emailing).

14 13

344

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

15. Press Install or Buy Now. 16. Enter your iTunes Store password.

15

17. Press OK. The application is downloaded to iPhone. You move to the Home screen where you see the application’s icon with the word “Loading” under it.

16 17

Application being downloaded

Using the App Store to Find and Install iPhone Applications

345

After the application is downloaded, it installs and you see the progress bar and “Installing” under the application’s icon. When the installation is complete, you see the application’s icon, and it is ready for you to use. (The next time you sync your iPhone, the application is also added to your iTunes Library.)

Keep the Home Screen Organized As you add application icons to the Home screen, you can organize your icons on the pages of the Home screen to organize them in a way that makes the screen layouts the most efficient for you to use. To learn how, see Chapter 11, “Customizing iPhone.”

Application being installed

Application ready to use

346

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

Using iPhone Applications You Install Button for an installed application

Open application

After you’ve installed applications, you use them just like iPhone’s default applications. Press the application’s icon on the Home screen, and it opens. At that point, how you use the application depends on the specific one you are using.

Maintaining iPhone Applications

347

Press to configure an installed application’s settings.

Some applications enable you to configure preferences using iPhone’s Settings tool. To see which of your applications provide settings, open the Settings screen and scroll to the bottom. If you see an application, press its name to access its settings.

Internet Required Many iPhone applications require a connection to the Internet. With these applications, you get better results when you are connected via Wi-Fi or 3G. Most work with the EDGE network, but they will be painfully slow.

Maintaining iPhone Applications Like applications you use on a computer, iPhone applications are regularly updated. When updates are available for applications installed on iPhone, you see a counter on the App Store icon that indicates updates for some or all of your installed applications are available. To update your applications, perform the following steps.

348

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

1

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Home screen.

2.

Press App Store.

3.

Press Updates. The applications for which updates are available are shown in the red circle. On the Updates screen, you see all of the installed applications for which an update is available. For each application, you see its developer, name, the version number of the update, and the release date.

4.

Scroll the screen to see all of the updates available.

5.

Press the application that you want to update. You move to the Update screen.

2

Number of updates for installed applications

5

4

3

Number of updates available

Maintaining iPhone Applications

6.

Read about the update.

7.

If the update is free, press FREE; if it isn’t, press the button showing the cost of the update. The button becomes the INSTALL button for a free update or Buy Now for an update that has a fee.

8.

Press INSTALL or Buy Now. If you haven’t updated other applications recently, you’re prompted to enter your iTunes Store password (if you don’t see the prompt, skip steps 9 and 10).

9.

Enter your iTunes Store password.

349

7 6

10. Press OK.

8

9 10

350

•

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

The update begins to download to iPhone. You move back to the Home screen, where you see the updated application’s icon with the word “Loading” under it. During this process, the original version of the application remains on the screen.

Using iTunes to Check for Updates You can also update applications via iTunes. Select the Applications source on the Source list. Click the Check for Updates link or the X Updates Available link (where X is the number of updates available if you’ve already checked for updates) at the bottom of the iTunes window. iTunes checks the versions of applications in your library versus the current versions that are available. If newer versions are found, you can download them. The next time you sync iPhone, the updates move from the library onto iPhone.

•

When the download process is complete, you see the progress of the installation process under the icon. When the install process starts, the original application icon disappears.

Update is downloading. Application being updated

Update is installing.

Removing Applications from iPhone

•

351

When installation is complete, the status information disappears. The next time you run the application, you use the updated version.

Updated application

Removing Applications from iPhone Not all that glitters is gold, and not all iPhone applications are worth keeping. You can get rid of iPhone applications you don’t use. If you delete an application that you installed from the iTunes Library or if you sync’d the iPhone since you installed the application (so that it was moved from iPhone to the iTunes Library), it will be added to iPhone again the next time you sync if that application is included in the sync settings. To permanently remove an application from iPhone, you can remove it from the sync settings or delete the application from the Application’s source in iTunes. To permanently remove an application from both locations, remove it from the Applications source on the iTunes Source list and also remove it from iPhone. Before you do that though, you need to carefully consider if you really want to permanently remove the application, depending on which of two situations you are in. One situation is if you’ve purchased the application, you should keep a copy in your iTunes Library but remove it from the sync settings and then delete it from iPhone; this will allow you to reinstall the application at some point in the future without paying for it again. The other situation is if the application manages data for you that isn’t available elsewhere; when you delete an application from iPhone, all the data it is managing goes away too. Make sure you have that data backed up or available elsewhere before you delete an application. Except for these caveats, the steps of deleting an application from iPhone are simple.

352

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the page of the Home screen showing the icon for the application you want to delete.

2.

Press and hold the icon of the application you want to delete until the icons on the screen start shaking and the Delete buttons appear.

3.

Press the Delete button for the application you want to delete.

4.

Press Delete at the prompt. The application and all of its data are deleted from iPhone.

1

3 2

4

Finding Your Way with Maps

353

Finding Your Way with Maps The Maps application just might be one of the most useful iPhone applications, especially if you are directionally challenged like I am. Using the Maps application, you can find the location of addresses using Google Maps.You can also get directions from one address to another. Even better, in most cases, you can use GPS or cell network data to show your current location on the map and on the routes you generate. Also maps are linked to your contacts, so you can quickly show the location of any address in your contacts on a map and then get directions.You can even see current traffic conditions along the way. A number of ways exist to find locations on the map, such as by searching or by using a contact’s address. After you find a location, you can use that location for different purposes, such as to create driving directions.

Press Maps to find your way.

To open the Maps application, press the Maps button on the iPhone Home screen. The application appears, and you can start finding your way.

>>>step-by-step Finding a Location by Searching You can search for locations in many ways. Your search can be very specific, such as an address, or your search can be more general, such as a search for gas stations or restaurants.

354

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

The original iPhone can’t access GPS information and is limited to using its cellular network to determine its location. This is much less accurate than GPS. If you have an original iPhone, you can still use Maps as described in this section, but none of the GPS information applies to you. 1.

Press in the Search bar (if you don’t see the Search bar, press Search at the bottom of the screen). The keyboard appears.

1

Easy Searching As you enter a search, iPhone attempts to match what you type with recent searches. As it finds matches, it presents the list of matches to you. Click a search on the list to perform it. 2.

Type your search.You can enter an address, city, category, or just about anything else.The more specific your search term, the more likely it is that you’ll find the location. But general searches can be helpful, such as a search for gas stations. iPhone remembers the context of your last search, so if you want to change the general area of the search item, you should include a state or zip code in the search term. For example, if you search for an address in one state and then perform a general search (such as for libraries), iPhone searches in the area of the address for which you previously searched. To change that context, enter the state or zip code where you want to search (such as libraries Indiana to find libraries in Indiana).

2

3

Finding Your Way with Maps

Spelling Counts

355

Your current location (cell network)

As you type a search, iPhone attempts to identify typos; if it finds one, it presents a prompt that enables you to change the term to iPhone’s recommendation.

4 3.

Press Search. The map appears, and the locations that meet your search criteria are marked with push pins; the location that iPhone thinks is most likely to be the one you are looking for has the Info bar above it. Your current location is shown in the blue circle if it is identified by the cell network or in the blue dot if iPhone is using GPS.

Clear a Search To clear a search, press the Clear button, which is the gray circle containing an “x,” located at the right end of the Search bar.

4.

To see information about a location, press the arrow in its Info bar. The location’s Info screen appears.

5.

Use the information in the Working with Maps task later in this chapter to find out more information about the location and to change the map’s view.

5

356

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

1

Finding a Location with Bookmarks Bookmarks enable you to save locations and return to them easily. (See the Working with Maps task later in this chapter to learn how to set bookmarks.) 1.

Open the Search screen and press the Lists button in the Search bar.

2.

Press Bookmarks. The Bookmarks screen appears.

3.

Browse up or down the list to see all the bookmarks available to you.

4.

Press the bookmark you want to see on the map. You move back to the map, and the bookmarked location is shown.

5.

Use the information in the Working with Maps task later in this chapter to find out more information about the location and to change the map’s view.

Very Useful Bookmark At the top of the Bookmarks list, you see Current Location. This is very useful when you are creating directions; when you press it, your current location is selected if you are generating directions, or you move to the map and your current location is shown (via GPS or a cell network).

3

4 2

5

Finding Your Way with Maps

Deleting or Changing Bookmarks

357

2

1

4

3

You can remove bookmarks from the list, and you can change their information as shown in the following steps. 1.

Move to the Bookmarks screen.

2.

Press Edit. Unlock and Order buttons appear for each bookmark.

3.

To change the order of bookmarks, press a bookmark’s Order button and drag it up or down the list of bookmarks.

4.

To delete a bookmark, press its Unlock button.

5.

Press Delete. The bookmark is deleted from the list.

6.

To change a bookmark’s name, press it. The Edit Bookmark screen appears.

5 6

358

7. 8.

9.

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

Use the keyboard to make changes to the bookmark’s name.

8

Press Bookmarks. You return to the Bookmarks screen, and the changes you made to the bookmark’s name are shown.

7

When you’re done making changes, press Done. You exit the Edit mode and can work with bookmarks again—or press Done again to return to the map.

Other Ways to Find Locations You can also find a location by opening a contact and pressing an address; you move to the map showing the location of the address you pressed. To do this, press the Lists button in the Search bar and then press Contacts. Use the All Contacts screen to find the contact with the address you want to see on the map. You can also repeat a recent search by pressing the Lists button and then pressing Recents; press the recent search you want to perform again.

9

Finding Your Way with Maps

Finding Your Current Location When you are using a map, knowing your current location is very important. iPhone has two ways to identify your location, via GPS or via a cell network. GPS locations are more accurate, so iPhone uses a GPS signal if it is available; if not, it uses the current cell network to identify your location. The steps you use to find your location are the same; iPhone chooses the method automatically. 1.

Move into Maps.

2.

Press the Search tab.

3.

Press the My Location button. What you see depends on the method iPhone uses to locate you.

2 3

Location circle

If iPhone uses a cell network, you see a large blue circle with cross hairs to show your general location. If iPhone can make your location more specific, the map zooms in, and the location circle gets smaller until iPhone has your location pinpointed as precisely as possible. Location circle

359

360

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

If iPhone can use GPS for your location, you see the blue GPS locator dot on the map. The dot pulses to show you that it is a dynamic display, meaning the dot moves as you do. Because GPS is more accurate, iPhone uses it first. GPS signals are usually blocked by buildings, so if you are inside, it’s unlikely GPS will be available. When you are using GPS with a route, pressing the My Location button—such that it is dark blue—keeps the GPS marker centered on the screen This is helpful, so you can always see your current location as you move.

More on Location Services Other applications in addition to Maps can use location services to determine your current location; when they attempt to do so, you are prompted to allow it or not. If you allow access to your location, the application can do what it was trying to do. If you don’t want iPhone to be able to locate you in any situation, move to the General settings screen and press Location Services ON to turn off this capability. Neither GPS nor cell network location functionality will work.

GPS location

Finding Your Way with Maps

Working with Maps

361

1

After you find locations on a map, you can work with them for a variety of purposes. 1.

Using the techniques (such as searching for a location) explained in the previous sections, find locations in which you are interested.

2.

To zoom in on a location, doublepress the map near the location or unpinch the map to zoom in.

3.

To scroll the map, drag your finger up or down and left or right.

4.

Double-press to zoom out by a set amount or pinch your fingers together on the screen to zoom out.

5.

Press a location’s push pin. You see the name of the location.

6.

Press the More Info arrow. The Info screen appears.

6 5

2

4

3

362

7.

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

Use the information on the Info screen to call the location, view its website, or see it on the map.

7 Press phone numbers to call.

Show Them All When your search has found more than one location on the map, press List to see a listing of all the locations shown. Press a location to jump to it on the map. This is helpful when you’ve done a more general search and you want to see all the results easily.

8.

Scroll down the screen.

9.

To set a bookmark for the location press Add to Bookmarks. The Add Bookmarks screen appears.

Press URLs to open webpages.

8

Press addresses to move to the map.

Press to use in directions.

9 Press to create a new contact with the location’s information.

Press to add location’s information to an existing contact.

Finding Your Way with Maps

10. Use the keyboard to make changes to the bookmark’s name.

363

11

11. Press Save. The location is added to your bookmarks and you return to the Info screen. 12. Press Map. You move back to the map and can work with other locations.

10

Buttons Change The buttons you see on a location’s Info screen depend on the status of that location. For example, if you’ve already added the location as a bookmark, the Add to Bookmarks button doesn’t appear.

12

364

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

It’s Not All Good In its current release, iPhone's GPS functionality is pretty good, but it's not a full-fledged turn-by-turn navigation system with audible driving instructions like most dedicated GPS devices and some smart phones are. iPhone's GPS shows you your location on a map and tracks your motion with GPS. However, the GPS indicator on the screen isn't linked to the route you are following, and Maps does little to keep you on track; you have to watch the GPS marker and keep yourself on track visually (not the safest thing to do while you are driving). You have the option to keep the GPS marker centered on the screen, but because it isn’t linked to the route, if you get too far off track, you might see the route or the indicator, but not both. And iPhone doesn’t generate new routes for you automatically, you have to manually reset your current location and generate a new route. That's not good to do while you're driving either. Hopefully soon, iPhone's software will be upgraded to provide verbal turn-by-turn driving directions, rerouting, and so on. While it can be tough to use iPhone's GPS while you are driving because of how much you have to manipulate it to keep on track, it does work pretty well when you are walking. Because your motion is relatively slow, it's much safer to manipulate the map while you are walking than while driving. Google Maps on the Web currently has a walking option in beta; hopefully that will be moved onto iPhone Maps so you can choose to create walking directions or driving directions.

>>>step-by-step Getting Directions The Maps application can generate driving directions between two locations along with an estimate of how long the trip will take. Using Location services (GPS or cell network), you can see where you are along a route or how to get back to a route if you get off it.

Finding Your Way with Maps

1.

365

Press the Directions button. The Start and End boxes appear.

Can't Tell if You're Coming or Going? You can start the direction process from a location's Info screen by pressing the Directions To Here or Directions From Here button to set that location as the starting point or endpoint.

1 2.

Find the start location by searching for it or by using the Lists button to select it from a list. Finding a start or end location works just like finding any location. For example, you can use a bookmark, recent item, or contact information to set a location along with searching for a location.

3.

Find the end location by searching for it or by using the Lists button to select it from a list.

4.

Press Route. A path from the start location to the end location is generated and appears on the map in a purple line. The start point is shown as a green pushpin, while the end point is a red pushpin. If GPS location is available, you see your position on the map. If GPS isn’t available, but iPhone can determine your location using the cell network, you see the crosshairs icon to show your location.

2 3

4

366

5. 6.

Chapter 10

Working with iPhone Applications

Your location

Zoom or scroll the map as needed to view the entire route. When you're ready to start moving along the route, press Start. You see the first leg of the route. Instructions and information about the leg appear at the top of the screen.

Going Back Again

6

Start point

End point Route

To quickly reverse the current route, press Edit. Then press the Reverse button, which is located to the left of the Start and End fields.

7.

5

Follow your location along the first leg of the route. As you approach the next segment of the route, you see a circle on the route.

Keeping Centered To keep the GPS indicator on your screen (the map moves as you do instead of the indicator moving), press the My Location button located in the lower left corner of the screen. The button turn dark and the GPS indicator stays in the center of the screen while the map moves “under it.” As long as you remain on or near the route, you continue to see both the dark purple route line and the blue GPS indicator on the screen. If you get too far off the route, you might not see it on the screen. You can zoom out to see the route again, but you have to manually generate another route and choose Current Location as the starting point to get back on course.

Information about the current leg

Route Your location

7

Finding Your Way with Maps

8.

9.

After you've made the change to get onto the next segment of the route, press the Forward button to move to the next segment on the map. If the next leg isn’t visible on the current map, the GPS indicator may move off the map; press the My Location button to center the map on the indicator again.

367

9 8

10

Route

To move to a previous segment, press the Back button.

10. To change the route, press Edit.

Be Careful As I mentioned earlier, it takes some manual manipulation and looking at iPhone’s screen to move through a route on iPhone. This can distract you if you are driving a car, so be very careful. Remember that driving safely is more important than keeping on a route.

Your location

Use the Edit screen to make changes in the same way you set the route originally.

>>> Go Further

11.

Change in route

MORE ON MAPS Maps does more than I have room in this chapter to show. When you are viewing a map, press the Options button, which is the sheet with a folded corner located in the lower right corner of the screen. On the resulting menu, you see various tools. You can use the Drop Pin command to place your own pushpins on the map (very useful for creating directions when you don't know the exact address of where you want to go). You can use the Show Traffic to see traffic conditions. You can show a satellite view by pressing Satellite or show the map and a satellite view by pressing Hybrid. Pressing List shows you a route in list form; click a segment to see it on the map.

Customize the icons that appear on the Home screen.

Use Settings to customize how your iPhone looks and works.

In this chapter, you’ll explore the settings not related to specific iPhone functionality. The topics include the following: B B B B B B B

Customizing the Home screen Accessing iPhone settings Using Airplane mode Configuring general sound settings Setting screen brightness

11

Setting wallpaper Configuring general settings

Customizing iPhone If you’ve read earlier chapters, such as the chapters on iPod or email functionality, you already have experienced customizing iPhone by using its Settings application. Many of those settings relate directly to functionality discussed in other chapters, which is why they are covered in the context of those topics. However, a number of iPhone settings are more general in nature, which is where this chapter comes into play. One of most important things you can do to customize your iPhone is to configure the Home screen so it is most convenient for you (which doesn’t involve the Settings application, but this seemed the best place to talk about it). Some examples of general settings you want to become familiar with include Airplane mode (sets iPhone in “silent running” so that you can use iPod and other functions while you fly); sound settings (controls the noises iPhone makes); screen brightness (controls the brightness of the screen); and so on. While you might not use these functions everyday, they come in handy from time to time.

370

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

Customizing the Home Screen iPhone’s Home screen is the starting point for anything you do because this screen contains the icons that you use to access the various functions iPhone has to offer. The Home screen comes configured with icons in default locations. You can change the location of these icons to be more convenient for you; and as you add applications (see Chapter 10,“Working with iPhone Applications”) and create your own web page icons (see Chapter 6,“Surfing the Web”), it becomes even more important that you organize your Home screen so you can quickly get to the items you use most frequently. You can move icons within the same screen, and you can move icons between the pages of the Home screen.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Home screen.

2.

Press and hold any icon. After a moment, the icons begin jiggling, and you also see delete buttons next to certain icons. This indicates that you can move icons on the current Home screen and on other pages of the Home screen.

1

2

Customizing the Home Screen

3.

Press an icon you want to move and drag it to a new location; to move the icon onto a different page of the Home screen, drag it to the right or left side of the screen until the page changes.

4.

When the icon is in the position you want, lift your finger up. The icon is placed in that location.

5.

To remove an icon, press the delete button, which is the x in the upper left corner of the icon. Note that if you remove an application’s icon, you also remove the application itself.

371

3

Icons You Can Delete and Those You Can’t You can only delete icons you’ve added to iPhone, which are either applications you’ve installed or web pages you’ve added. When you remove an application’s icon, you also delete the application itself. You can’t delete any of the default applications. If you don’t use some of these, move them to later pages of the Home screen and replace them with icons you do use.

5 4

372

6.

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

When you are happy with the Home screen layout, press the Home button. The icons are locked in their current positions and stop jiggling.

Changing Icons On the Main Toolbar The icons on the main toolbar at the bottom of the screen are fair game for reorganization, too. You can move them around within the bar or you can drag them up onto the pages of the Home screen and replace them with icons from there. The only difference between the icons on the main toolbar and those on the pages of the Home screen is that the main toolbar is always visible when you are viewing the Home screen so you want to keep the four icons you use most often there.

Custom Home screen page

Using Airplane Mode

373

Accessing iPhone Settings

Scroll to see all settings.

To get to iPhone’s settings, move to the Home screen and press the Settings button. The Settings screen appears; scroll to see and use all the settings available. The following sections describe various setting options and show you how to configure them. (Remember that most settings were explained in the context of where they take effect, such as the Mail settings, which were explained in Chapter 5,“Emailing.” If settings you are interested in aren’t covered here, see the chapter on the related topic.)

Using Airplane Mode Although there’s a debate whether devices such as iPhone pose any real danger to the operation of aircraft, there’s no reason to run any risk by using iPhone while you are on an airplane. (Besides, not following crew instructions on airplanes can lead you to less-than-desirable situations.) When you place iPhone in Airplane mode, its transmitter and receivers are disabled so that it poses no threat to the operation of the aircraft. While it is in Airplane mode, you can’t use the phone, email, the Web, or any other functions that require communication between iPhone and other devices or networks. Of course, when you have permission to do so, you can use iPhone for iPod functions as well as all the other features that don’t require connections to networks.

374

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

To put iPhone in Airplane mode, move to the Settings screen and press the OFF button next to Airplane Mode. The OFF button becomes ON to show you that Airplane mode is enabled; all connections to network servers and the cell network stop, and iPhone goes into quiet mode in which it doesn’t broadcast or receive any signals.

Airplane icon indicates iPhone is in Airplane mode

Airplane mode button

In Airplane mode, you can use iPhone for various functions, such as iPod, photos, games, and so on. To turn Airplane mode off, move to the Settings screen and press the Airplane Mode ON button, which then becomes the OFF button to show you Airplane mode is disabled. iPhone resumes transmitting and receiving signals.

Configuring General Sound Settings You learned about most of iPhone’s sound settings in Chapter 1,“Making, Receiving, and Managing Calls,” and Chapter 3,“Listening to Audio and Watching Video.”Two sound settings are more general to iPhone, and the following steps describe how to access and change them.

Configuring General Sound Settings

375

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Settings screen and press Sounds. The Sounds screen appears.

2.

Scroll down the screen until you see the Lock Sounds and Keyboard Clicks settings.

3.

If you don’t want iPhone to make a sound when you lock it, press Lock Sounds ON. Its status becomes OFF. iPhone no longer makes this sound when you press the Wake/Sleep button to put it to sleep and lock it. Press OFF to reenable this sound.

4.

If you don’t like the audible feedback when you press keys on iPhone’s virtual keyboard, press Keyboard Clicks ON to disable that sound. Its status becomes OFF, and iPhone’s keyboard is silent as you type on it.

5.

Press Settings. You move back to the Settings screen.

1

2

5

3 4

376

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

Setting Screen Brightness Because you’re continually looking at iPhone’s screen, it should be the right brightness level for your eyes. However, the screen is also the largest single drain on battery power, so the less bright iPhone’s screen is, the longer its battery lasts. You have to find a good balance between viewing comfort and battery life. Fortunately, iPhone includes a brightness feature that adjusts for current lighting conditions automatically.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Settings screen and press Brightness. The Brightness screen appears.

2.

Press the ON button to disable the Auto-Brightness feature; its status becomes OFF. This keeps the screen brightness the same regardless of the lighting conditions in which you are using iPhone. Press OFF to enable this feature again; when enabled, iPhone’s screen dims when you are in low-level lighting conditions. You’ll get more battery life with Auto-Brightness on, but you might not be comfortable with the screen at a lower brightness.

3.

4.

Drag the slider to the right to raise the base brightness of the screen. This uses more power, but the screen is brighter. Drag the slider to the left to lower the base brightness of the screen. This causes the screen to be dimmer but uses less power.

5. Press Settings. You move back to the Settings screen.

1

5

3

4 2

Setting Wallpaper

377

Setting Wallpaper When iPhone is awake, but locked, you see its wallpaper. You can set the wallpaper for iPhone using either the default wallpaper collection or by choosing a photo you’ve moved onto iPhone. To use one of iPhone’s default images as your wallpaper, perform the following steps.

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Settings screen and press Wallpaper. The Wallpaper screen appears. You see the sources of wallpaper available to you.

2.

Press Wallpaper. The default wallpaper images appear.

Using Your Photos as iPhone Wallpaper To learn how to add photos to iPhone so that they are available as wallpaper, see Chapter 9,“Taking, Storing, and Viewing Photos.”You can select any of the sources of your photos on the Wallpaper screen to use any of the photos they contain as wallpaper by pressing the source you want to use instead of Wallpaper in step 2. You can also scale and move your own images to customize how they appear as wallpaper.

1

2

Your photos on iPhone that can be used as wallpaper

378

3.

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

Press the image you want to use as wallpaper. You see a preview of the image you selected.

4.

To set the wallpaper, press Set Wallpaper. You move back to the Settings screen. The next time iPhone is awake but locked, you see the wallpaper you selected.

5.

To choose a different wallpaper, press Cancel instead. You move back to the available wallpaper in the selected source.

3

Repeat steps 2 through 4 until you are happy with the wallpaper you selected.

Default wallpaper collection

5

4

Configuring General Settings iPhone has a large number of settings to control various behaviors including network access; security settings; and default preferences for the Home button, date and time, and other areas. You can also access information about iPhone, including statistics about your use and the kind of data stored there. These tools are all lumped under the imaginative name General settings. To configure iPhone’s general settings, do the following.

Configuring General Settings

379

>>>step-by-step 1.

Move to the Settings screen and press General. The General screen appears.

2.

Press About. You see the About screen.

3.

Scroll up and down the screen to view its information, such as the network, number of songs, videos, and photos, memory, software, serial number, and so on.

4.

Press General to move back to the General screen.

5.

Press Usage. The Usage screen appears.

1

2

4

What About Network and Bluetooth?

3

These settings are explained in Chapter 4 “Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs.”

5

380

6.

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

Review the information in which you are interested, such as current period call time, which you can use to monitor the minutes you’ve used under your calling plan. Note that the usage and standby information is from the time of your last full battery charge. The other values are from the last reset of the statistics you’ve done.

6

7.

To reset usage monitoring, scroll down the screen.

8

8.

Press Reset Statistics.

9.

Press Reset. The current statistics are reset, and logging begins anew (Lifetime Call Time information is not reset).

7

9

10. Press General to move back to the General settings screen. 11. If you don’t want applications, such as the Maps, to be able to access iPhone’s current location, press the Location Services ON button. The status becomes OFF to indicate that iPhone won’t be able to access the services it uses to identify where it is. So things like the GPS function won’t work. To re-enable these services, press OFF so that the status becomes ON. 12. Press Auto-Lock. The Auto-Lock screen appears.

11

12

Configuring General Settings

13.

Press the amount of idle time you want to wait before iPhone automatically locks and goes to sleep. You can choose from 1 to 5 minutes; choose Never if you want to manually lock iPhone. I recommend that you keep Auto-Lock set to a relatively small value to conserve your iPhone’s battery.

14.

Press General.

15.

If you want a passcode to be required to unlock iPhone, press Passcode Lock. The Set Passcode screen appears.

16.

14 13

15

Enter a four-digit passcode.

Passcode Lock With passcode lock enabled, you must enter the passcode to be able to unlock iPhone, so make sure you don’t forget your passcode.

381

16

382

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

17. Re-enter the passcode. If the two passcodes match, you see the Passcode Lock screen. 18. To disable the passcode, press Turn Passcode off and enter the passcode. You move back to the General screen, and the passcode is removed from iPhone; if you want to set it again, you need to repeat steps 15 through 17.

17

19. To change your passcode, press Change Passcode. You then enter your current passcode and enter your new passcode twice. You return to the Passcode Lock screen, and the new passcode takes effect. 20. To set the amount of time iPhone is locked before a passcode is required to unlock it, press Require Passcode. The Require Passcode screen appears. 21. Press the amount of time iPhone is locked before the passcode takes effect. For example, to have the passcode take effect after iPhone has been locked for one minute, press After 1 minute. The shorter this time is, the more secure iPhone is, but also the more times you’ll have to enter the passcode if you lock and unlock iPhone frequently. 22. Press Passcode Lock.

18 19 20

22 21

Configuring General Settings

23.

To hide previews of messages you receive while iPhone is locked, press Show SMS Preview ON. The setting becomes OFF, and iPhone no longer previews text messages for you when it is locked. Press OFF to restore the message previews.

24.

Press General. The General screen appears.

25.

To limit the kind of content or functions that can be used on iPhone, press Restrictions. The Restrictions screen appears.

26.

Press Enable Restrictions.

27.

Create a restrictions passcode. You have to enter this passcode to change the content restrictions.

28.

383

24

23

25

26

Re-enter your restrictions passcode. You return to the Restrictions screen, and the Allow buttons are enabled.

27

28

384

29.

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

Press the ON button next to content you want to disable. Its status becomes OFF to show you that content or function can’t be accessed. For example, to prevent web browsing, press ON next to Safari; the status becomes OFF, and the Safari icon is removed from the Home screen and can’t be used.With the other controls, you can prevent access to iTunes content that is labeled as Explicit,YouTube videos, the iTunes Download application, and the Installing Apps function.

30.

To turn off the restrictions, press Disable Restrictions and enter your restrictions passcode. Access to all content and functions is permitted again, and the Allow buttons are disabled.

31.

Press General. You move back to the General screen.

32.

To configure how the Home button works, press Home Button. The Home Button screen appears.

33.

Press the action that you want to happen when you press the Home button twice: press Home to move to the Home screen (same as a single press), press Phone Favorites to move to the Favorites page in the Phone application, or iPod to show the iPod controls.

34.

If you always want the iPod controls to appear when you press the Home button twice while music is playing, leave the iPod Controls setting to ON; if you always want the default action you set in step 33 to happen instead, press ON so it becomes OFF.

35.

Press General.

31 30

29

32

35

33 34

Configuring General Settings

36.

Press Keyboard. The Keyboard screen appears.

37.

To prevent iPhone from automatically capitalizing as you type, press Auto-Capitalization ON. Its status becomes OFF, and iPhone no longer changes the case of letters as you type them.

38.

To disable the Caps Lock key, press Enable Caps Lock ON. The status becomes OFF, and when the keyboard appears, you can’t use the Caps Lock key.

39.

To change the keyboard’s configuration, press International Keyboards. You move to the Keyboards screen.

41.

Press the OFF button next to the keyboard languages you want to enable so their status becomes ON. Turn off any keyboards that you want to disable by pressing their ON buttons so their status becomes OFF.You must have at least one keyboard style selected, but you can have multiple keyboards active at the same time. (Some languages have sub-menus you use to choose the keyboard layouts you want for that language.)

42.

36

37

To disable the shortcut that types a period followed by a space when you press the space bar twice, press “.” Shortcut ON. Its status becomes OFF, and you must press a period and the space bar to type these characters.

40.

Press Keyboard. The number of keyboards you have enabled is shown in the International Keyboards menu.

385

38 39 40

42

41

386

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

43. Press General. You return to the General screen.

43

Who’s Got Time? The Date & Time settings are covered in Chapter 8,“Working with Date & Time and the Calendar.”

44. Press International. The International screen appears. 45. To change the language that iPhone uses, press Language. The Language screen appears.

44

Multiple Languages? When you have more than one language enabled, a Globe button appears on iPhone’s keyboard to the left of the space bar. Pressing this button cycles through each of the enabled languages. When you reach the language you want to use, you can type using the characters for that language. 46.

47.

Press the language you want to use. The selected language is marked with a check mark. Press Done. iPhone starts using the language you selected.

45

47 46

Configuring General Settings

48. To configure the keyboards available on iPhone, press Keyboards and follow steps 41 and 42. 49. To change the formats used for dates, times, phone numbers, and so on, press Region Format. The Region Format screen appears.

50. Press the region whose formats you want to use. Some regions have alternate format choices; you can choose from among the format options that are used in those regions. 51. Press International. At the bottom of the International screen, you see examples of the format you selected.

52. Press General.

53. To reset iPhone’s settings, press Reset. The Reset screen appears.

48 49

51

50

52

53

387

388

Chapter 11

Customizing iPhone

54. To reset all settings to the defaults, press Reset All Settings and then press Reset All Settings again to confirm. All of iPhone’s settings are returned to the default states. 55. To reset all settings and delete all content (such as music), press Erase All Content and Settings; press Erase iPhone at the prompt. All of iPhone’s settings are returned to defaults, and all content you’ve added is erased. 56. To return only the network settings to defaults, press Reset Network Settings and then Reset Network Settings again at the prompt. You’ll need to reconfigure iPhone to connect to your networks (see Chapter 4). 57. To return iPhone to its default dictionary, press Reset Keyboard Dictionary followed by Reset Dictionary at the prompt. Any words you’ve added to iPhone’s dictionary are removed, and it returns to its default state. 58. To return the Home screen to the default layout, press Reset Home Screen Layout and Reset Home Layout again at the prompt. Icons on the Home screen are retuned to their default locations. 59. To reset the warnings iPhone has sent you when you use the location finder features, press Reset Location Warnings, and then Reset Location Warnings again at the prompt. 60. Press General. You return to the General screen.

60 54 55 56 57 58 59

This page intentionally left blank

iPhone is easy to maintain and isn’t likely to give you much trouble.

In this chapter, you’ll learn how to keep iPhone in top shape and to know what to do should problems happen. Topics include the following: B Maintaining iPhone B Solving iPhone problems

12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems You see that this is a short chapter, and there is a good reason for that: iPhone works very well, and you are unlikely to have problems with it, especially if you keep iTunes’ and iPhone’s software current. When problems do occur, you can usually solve them with a few simple steps. If that fails, there’s lots of help available for you on the Internet.

Maintaining iPhone Some basic maintenance tasks keep iPhone in top working condition. Even better, you can do most of these tasks with just a couple of mouse clicks because you can configure iTunes to do most of the work for you.

392

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

Maintaining iTunes As you’ve learned in this book, iTunes is a vital partner for iPhone. You should keep iTunes current to ensure that you have the latest bug fixes, new features, and so on. Fortunately, you can configure iTunes to maintain itself.

>>>step-by-step Maintaining iTunes on Windows PCs 1.

In iTunes, choose Edit, Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears.

2.

Click the General tab.

3.

Check the Check for updates automatically check box.

4.

Click OK. The dialog closes. Periodically, iTunes checks for updates. When it finds an update, it prompts you to download and install it. Follow the onscreen instructions to do so.

3

4

Check for Updates Now Windows To check for updates at any time, choose Help, Check for Updates. iTunes checks for updates immediately. If you are using the current version, you see a message telling you so. If an update is available, iTunes prompts you to download and install it.

Maintaining iPhone

393

Maintaining iTunes on Macs 1.

Open the System Preferences application.

2.

Click Software Update.

3.

Check the Check for updates check box.

4.

Choose the frequency that iTunes checks for updates on the pop-up menu.

5.

Check the Download important updates automatically check box.

6.

Quit System Preferences. The Mac checks for updates for iTunes, along with all the other Apple software on your Mac according to the timeframe you selected. When it identifies an update, it downloads the update automatically and prompts you to install it or prompts you to download and install it, depending on the kind of update it is.

Check for Updates Now Mac To check for updates at any time, open the Apple menu and choose Software Update. The Software Update application runs. If it finds an iTunes update, it prompts you to download and install it.

2

3

5

4

394

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

>>>step-by-step Maintaining iPhone’s Software One of iTunes’ iPhone functions is to maintain iPhone’s software, which is one of the reasons you should keep iTunes current. Periodically, iTunes checks for new iPhone software. When iTunes finds updates, it installs them for you. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer.

2.

Select your iPhone on the Source list.

3.

Click the Summary tab. You see the current version of iPhone’s software at the top of the screen.

4.

If a newer version of iPhone software is available, click Update or click Check for Update to manually check for an update. (If you manually check for an update and you’re using the current version of iPhone’s software, you see a dialog telling you so, and you can skip the rest of these steps. If you aren’t using the current version, the button becomes Update.)

5.

Read information about the update and follow the onscreen instructions to download and install it onto iPhone.

3

4

2

5

Maintaining iPhone

6.

Agree to the license agreement. iPhone begins to download and install the update on iPhone. When the software has been downloaded and installed, iPhone is automatically restarted. As the process proceeds, you see various status messages in iTunes. Eventually, iPhone disappears from iTunes, is restarted, and becomes available in iTunes again, and you see that your software is current.

Auto Updates When you connect iPhone to your computer and an update for iPhone is available, you are automatically prompted to allow iTunes to download and install it. If you don’t allow it, you can always install it later with the following steps.

395

6

396

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

Maintaining iPhone’s Power Battery status

Obviously, an iPhone with a dead battery isn’t good for very much. As you use iPhone, you should keep an eye on its battery status. As long as the battery status is green, you’re okay. As iPhone gets low on power, the battery on the status icon becomes empty and eventually turns red. Two separate warnings will alert you when the battery lowers to 20% and then again at 10%. If you keep going from there, iPhone runs out of power and shuts down. Of course, it gives you plenty of warning through onscreen messages before this happens. This iPhone is charging.

The obvious way to prevent battery problems is to keep iPhone charged. The good news is that all you have to do is to connect iPhone to your computer,

Maintaining iPhone

397

and its battery charges. While this is occurring, you see the charging icon in the upper-right corner of the screen, and if you wake iPhone up, a large battery icon showing the relative state of the battery appears on its screen. When charging is complete, the battery status icon reappears, the large battery icon disappears, and you see iPhone’s wallpaper if it’s locked, or you see whatever screen you happen to be using if it isn’t locked. You can also connect iPhone to the external charger included in its box if your computer isn’t handy.

Keeping iPhone Topped Off It’s a good idea to keep your iPhone’s battery topped off; this type of battery actually does better if you keep it charged rather than letting it run down all the way before recharging. Periodically, say every month or two, you might want to let iPhone run completely out of power to maximize its life.

With all of iPhone’s capabilities in constant use (accessing the 3G network, push email, and so on), its battery runs out of power relatively quickly; in my typical use while on business travel, I do well to make it through an entire day without having to recharge iPhone. But I have email push turned on with several accounts, use the Web constantly, and often am talking or playing music at the same time. (At press time, Apple released version 2.1 of the iPhone software. One of the benefits touted for this version is a significant improvement in battery life. Hopefully, this will reduce iPhone’s power consumption, so it can go longer between charges.) To make the battery last as long as possible, consider the following recommendations: • Put iPhone to sleep when you aren’t using it by pressing the Sleep/Lock button. • Set Auto-Lock to a small interval, such as 1 Minute. When iPhone locks, it goes to sleep immediately, which puts it in low-power mode (Settings, General, Auto-Lock).

• Set the brightness of the screen to a low but comfortable level and leave Auto-Brightness turned on (Settings, General, Brightness).

398

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

• Use a Wi-Fi connection to the Internet whenever you can (see Chapter 4, “Connecting to the Internet, Bluetooth Devices, and VPNs”). Wi-Fi uses less power than the 3G network. • Disable features you don’t use, especially those that communicate with other devices. Specific suggestions follow.

• If you don’t use Bluetooth devices, make sure Bluetooth is turned off (Settings, General, Bluetooth OFF).

• If you don’t need the speed offered by the 3G network, turn it off (Settings, General, Network, Enable 3G OFF).

• If you don’t need email to be pushed to any email accounts (see Chapter 5,“Emailing”), disable email push (Settings, Fetch New Data, Push OFF).

Maintaining iPhone

399

• If you do need email pushed to some accounts, disable push for the accounts you don’t need email pushed to (Settings, Fetch New Data, Advanced, email account, Manual).

• Set email to be manually fetched instead of automatically fetched. (Settings, Fetch New Data, Manually).

• Inactivate email accounts you don’t need to use at all (Settings, Mail, Contacts, Calendars, email account, Account OFF).

• Run in Airplane mode when you can. When iPhone is in Airplane mode, all the features that require connections to the Internet or other devices are disabled, which are also the features that use power most quickly. It’s fast and easy to move in and out of Airplane mode (Settings, Airplane mode OFF or ON). So, when you want to conserve battery power and don’t need the functions that connect to the Internet or the cell network, enable Airplane mode, whether you happen to be on an airplane or not.

400

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

Cleaning iPhone’s Screen iPhone’s onscreen controls are amazing. But because you use them by pressing and dragging your fingers on the screen, the screen gets smudged. You can clean the screen using the cloth included with iPhone by rubbing it carefully. You should never spray any cleaners directly onto iPhone’s screen. However, you can apply a slight amount of glass cleaner to a very soft cloth and gently wipe iPhone’s screen to clean it. In most cases though, you can get the screen clean with the provided cloth by itself.

Keeping a Clean Screen If the smudges on iPhone screen bother you, consider adding a clear plastic protector to the screen. There are many kinds of these available (some cases come with one), but they all work in the same way in that they have a side that clings to the screen. You touch the other side, which is more resistant to smudges than is iPhone’s glass screen. Using a protector sheet does change the feel of using and the look of iPhone so you might or might not like to use one. These protectors also help guard against scratches. While iPhone’s screen is pretty tough, it can be scratched.

Solving iPhone Problems Even a device as good as iPhone can sometimes run into problems. Fortunately, the solutions to most problems you encounter are simple. If those simple solutions don’t work, there’s lots of detailed help available from Apple, and there’s even more available from the community of iPhone users. The problems that you can address with the simple steps described in this section vary and range from such issues as the iPhone hanging (won’t respond to commands) to iPhone not being visible in iTunes (can’t be synced). No matter which problem you experience, try the following steps to solve them.

Solving iPhone Problems

>>>step-by-step Restarting iPhone If iPhone starts acting up, restart it. 1.

Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears on the screen.

2.

Drag the red slider to the right. iPhone powers down.

3.

Press the Sleep/Wake button once. iPhone restarts, during which time the Apple logo appears on its screen. When the Home screen appears, try using iPhone again. If the problem is solved, you’re done.

Restarting the Computer and iTunes If iTunes can no longer see iPhone, restart the computer and open iTunes again. 1.

Disconnect iPhone from the computer.

2.

Restart the computer.

3.

After the computer restarts, connect iPhone to it. iTunes should open, and the iPhone should be selected on the Source list. If so, all should be well. If not, you need to try something else.

2

401

402

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

Resetting iPhone If restarting iPhone or the computer doesn’t help, try resetting iPhone using the following escalation of steps. 1.

If you are using an application and it freezes, press and hold the Home button down for at least 6 seconds. The application quits, and you return to the Home screen.

2.

Restart iPhone using the earlier steps. If the problem goes away, you’re done. If not, continue to the next step.

3.

Press and hold down both the Home button and the Sleep/Wake button for at least 10 seconds. You should see the Power Off slider; if you do, shut down and then restart iPhone. If you don’t see the slider, iPhone should turn off and then restart; you can release the buttons when you see the Apple logo on the screen. If the problem goes away, you’re done. If not, continue.

4.

If you can use iPhone’s controls, proceed with the following steps. If you can’t use any of its controls, you need to restore iPhone, which the next section explains.

5.

On the Home screen, press Settings. The Settings screen appears.

6.

Press General. The General screen appears.

5

6

Solving iPhone Problems

403

All USB Ports Are Not Created Equal If your computer can’t see iPhone when it’s connected, try a different USB port. You should use a USB port on the computer itself rather than one on a keyboard or USB hub. 7.

Scroll down until you see the Reset command.

8.

Press Reset. The Reset screen appears.

9.

Press Reset All Settings.

10.

Press Reset All Settings at the prompt. All settings on iPhone reset to their defaults, and iPhone restarts. If the problem goes away, you’re done—except for reconfiguring your settings, of course. If not, continue.

11.

Repeat steps 5 through 8 to move back to the Reset screen.

12.

Press Erase All Content and Settings. When you do this, you lose all the content on iPhone. Make sure that you have that content elsewhere before you erase iPhone. If the content is in your iTunes Library, you’re fine. But if you’ve added information that you have not synced to iTunes, such as contacts, directly onto iPhone, you lose that information when you erase iPhone.

13.

Press Erase iPhone at the prompt. iPhone is erased, and it should return to like-new condition. You have to sync it again, reconfigure its settings, and so on. If the problem recurs, you must restore iPhone.

7

8

9 12

404

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

Reset Specific Areas If you are experiencing problems in a specific area, such as connecting to a network, try resetting just that area (for example, Reset Network Settings) before you pull out the big gun by erasing iPhone.

Restoring iPhone The most severe action you can take on iPhone is to restore it. When this happens, iPhone is erased, so you lose all its contents, and its current software is overwritten with the latest version. If you have added information to iPhone since it was last backed up (when you last connected it to the computer), that information is lost when you restore iPhone so be careful before doing this. If none of the other steps corrected the problems, restoring iPhone should. 1.

Connect iPhone to your computer.

2.

Select iPhone on the Source list.

3.

Click the Summary tab. You see the current version of iPhone’s software at the top of the screen.

4.

Click Restore. Remember that you lose everything on iPhone when you restore it, so make sure that you have all its data stored elsewhere before you do this.

3

4

Solving iPhone Problems

5.

Click Restore in the dialog. iTunes erases iPhone and reinstalls its software. This can take several minutes; iTunes displays progress dialogs along the way so that you know what’s happening.

6.

When the process is complete, click OK in the completion dialog. iPhone restarts and appears in iTunes just as when you first connected it to your computer. The Set Up Your iPhone screen appears.

7.

Click the Restore from the backup of radio button.

8.

On the pop-up menu, choose your iPhone’s previous name.

9.

Click Continue. iTunes again resets iPhone, and it restarts. This time, your previous information is restored to iPhone so that it’s not quite like starting over, but close to it.

10. Click OK in the completion dialog. iPhone appears on the Source list in iTunes. 11. Using the steps in previous chapters in this book, reconfigure iPhone’s settings, including synchronization options. You do this the same way you did when iPhone was new.

405

5

7

8

9

406

Chapter 12

Maintaining iPhone and Solving iPhone Problems

How Does It Remember My Phone Number? You might wonder how iPhone can be restored. It’s because iTunes backs up critical iPhone settings, such as activation information and some configuration settings, on your computer. Each time you sync, this information is backed up on the computer so that it is available again when it is needed, such as when you restore iPhone.

Reinstalling iTunes If iTunes continues to be unable to see iPhone and iPhone appears to be working, reinstall iTunes on your computer. (This is much more likely to be necessary on a Windows PC than on a Mac.) See the Prologue for instructions on downloading and installing iTunes on your computer.

No iTunes Content Worries iTunes stores content, such as music and video, in a different location than the application itself. You can reinstall iTunes without disturbing your iTunes content. Of course, you should always have your iTunes content backed up, such as storing it on a DVD, in case something happens to your computer.

Trouble Sending Email from iPhone? If you are sure you’ve configured an email account correctly, and you can receive email to that address, but you can’t send any from that address, the provider of the account probably doesn’t allow sending email from any IP address except those it provides. This is most common when the email is provided through an Internet Service Provider, such as a cable company. You have a couple of solutions. One is to access your email through the provider’s web email interface. The other is to add a second email account (such as a Gmail account) to iPhone and use that account when you want to send mail. See Chapter 5 for information about choosing the account through which you are sending email.

Solving iPhone Problems

407

Getting Help with iPhone Problems If none of the previous steps solved the problem, you can get help in a number of ways: • Apple’s website Move to www.apple.com/support/. On this page, you can access all kinds of information about iPhone and other Apple products. You can browse for help, and you can search for answers to specific problems. Many of the resulting articles have detailed, step-by-step instructions to help you solve problems as well as links to more information. • AT&T’s website Move to www.wireless.att.com. You can get help with problems you’re having with your connection to the AT&T network, and you can log in to your AT&T account to get information about it. • Web searches One of the most useful ways to get help is to do a web search for the specific problem you’re having. Just open your favorite search tool, such as Google, and search for the problem. You are very likely to find many resources to help you, including websites, forums, and such. If you encounter a problem, it’s likely someone else has, too, and they’ve probably put the solution on the Web. • Me You’re welcome to send email to me for problems you’re having with iPhone. My address is [email protected]. I’ll do my best to help you as soon as I can.

Index NUMBERS 24-hour clock, 270 3G networks, 165-166

A account information, finding, 61-63 Address bar, 237 Airplane mode, 373-374 alarms configuring, 279-283 deleting, 282 disabling/enabling, 283 dismissing, 284 editing, 282 event alarms, 307 naming, 280 snooze function, 280 albums, viewing in iTunes, 131 alerts events, 302 new text message sound, 257 voicemail, 55 answering phone calls, 46-48 AOL AIM instant messaging application, 256 App Store (iTunes Store), 341-344

Apple ID, 16, 100-101 Apple website, 407 applications App Store (iTunes Store) finding in, 341-343 installing with, 344 iPhone deleting from, 351-352 moving to, 340 iTunes Store downloading with, 338-339 reviewing in, 343 searching in, 340 installed applications, using, 346-347 Tell a Friend option, 343 updating, 347, 349 artists, searching music by, 124-125 AT&T networks AT&T EDGE network connections, 221 roaming charges, 36 website, 407 attachments (email), viewing, 205 audio CDs, importing in iTunes, 98-99

configuring

audio files C downloading from iTunes Store, 100-102, caches, clearing, 225 calendars 116-118 events playing with iPod adding by accepting Control Bar, 133 invitiations, 304-305 Auto-Brightness feature, adding manually, 376 299-302 Auto-Capitalization feaalert sounds, 302, 307 ture, 385 deleting, 297 Auto-Lock settings, 380 editing, 298 viewing, 296 B support for, 287 battery, charging, 396, 398 synchronizing with blind copies of email mesExchange, 290 sages, 198 iCal, 294 Bluetooth connections, MobileMe, 20, 167-168 288-290 bookmarks (Safari). See multiple calendars, also favorites (Internet 292 Explorer) Outlook, 293 adding, 247, 362 push calendars, 291 browsing, 356-358 viewing, 295-296 deleting, 246, 357 call forwarding, 34 moving call waiting, 35 MobileMe accounts caller ID, hiding, 35 to iPhone, 20 camera to iPhone, 228-231 landscape mode, 310 to websites, 232-234 lens, 5 organizing, 242-245 photos renaming, 358 deleting, 311 saving, 241-242 taking with, 309, 312 sorting, 357 viewing, 310 BootP, network connecCaps Lock key, tions with, 164 enabling/disabling, 385 brightness, configuring, cell account information, 376 finding, 61-63 broadcast Wi-Fi network charging batteries, connections, 154-158, 396-398 161-162 cities, associating with browsers (web). See clocks, 277 Internet Explorer; Safari cleaning screen, 400

409

clearing cache, 225 cookies, 224 location searches, 355 Recents list, 50 website history, 224 clocks 24-hour clocks, 270 alarms, 279-284 associating cities with, 277 configuring, 276-278 current time, viewing, 275 date and time settings, 11, 270-275 deleting, 278 renaming, 278 reordering, 278 sleep timer, 287 stopwatch, 284-285 timer, 285-287 Closed Captioning, 150 company contacts, 79 conference calls, 43-45 configuring alarms, 279-283 clocks, 276-278 contacts display, 65-66 date and time settings, 270-275 email accounts, 176 advanced configuration, 187-189 changing configurations, 200 manually, 181-186, 192-193 retrieval settings, 195 synchronizing with Mac, 180 synchronizing with Windows, 179 with MobileMe, 177

410

configuring

Exchange accounts for iPhone, 19 global email settings, 196-199 iPod Control Bar, 132 settings, 146-150 toolbar, 145-146 MobileMe accounts for MAC, 21 Windows PC, 19-20 phone settings, 28, 31-36 Safari settings, 222-225 settings Airplane mode, 373-374 general settings, 378-380, 383, 386-388 screen brightness settings, 376 sound, 374 wallpaper, 377-378 time zone, 271 contacts adding to favorites, 51, 89 addresses, viewing, 89 associating photos with, 78-79 ringtones with, 82 websites with, 83 calling, 89 changing adding additional information, 93-94 by synchronizing, 90-91 manually, 91-92 company contacts, 79 configuring display of, 65-66

creating from email messages, 74-75 from maps, 76-77 from recent phone calls, 71-72 from text message conversations, 75-76 manually, 78-86 custom labels, 82 deleting, 95 dialing with, 38 duplicates, handling, 68 Exchange contact information, moving to iPhone, 67-68 information fields, adding to, 86 MobileMe contact information, moving to iPhone, 20, 67-68 photos assigning to, 328, 330 associating with, 78-79 deleting, 330 sending email messages to, 89, 208 text messages to, 89, 259 SIM contacts, importing, 71 synchronizing with Mac OS, 70 Windows, 69 viewing, 88 Control Bar (iPod), 132-133 conversations (text messaging), 263-264 clearing, 265 contacts, creating from, 75-76 deleting, 266

cookies, 223-224 Cover Flow browser, searching music with, 119-121 current location, finding with Maps application, 359-360 current time/date, displaying, 11, 275 custom labels, creating, 82

D date and time settings. See also clocks configuring, 270-275 displaying, 11, 275 Debug Console, 225 default email accounts, setting, 199 default search engine, changing, 222 deleting alarms, 282 applications from iPhone, 351-352 bookmarks, 246, 357 calendar events, 297 clocks, 278 contact photos, 330 contacts, 95 conversations (text messages), 266 email accounts, 202 email messages, 198, 214-215 Home screen icons, 371 photos, 325 videos, 138-139 voicemail, 58-59 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol), 164

events (calendar)

dialing phone numbers E with EDGE network conneccontacts, 38, 89 tions, 167 favorites, 39 editing keypad, 37 alarms, 282 Recents list, 40-41 calendar events, 298 directions (driving), driving directions, 367 364-367 text, 10 disabling email 24-hour clock, 270 accounts Airplane mode, 374 configuring, 176, alarms, 283 181-189, 192-193, Auto-Brightness fea200 ture, 376 deleting, 202 Auto-Capitalization feadisabling, 201 ture, 385 global settings, call waiting, 35 196-199 Caps Lock key, 385 retrieval settings, 195 email SMTP server settings, accounts, 201 190 sounds, 199 synchronizing with JavaScript, 222 Mac, 180 passcodes, 381 synchronizing with plug-ins, 223 Windows, 179 pop-up blocking, 223 with MobileMe, 177 snooze function addresses (alarms), 280 removing from email TTY support, 36 messages, 208 vibrations (phone settyping for sending tings), 32 email messages, dismissing alarms, 284, 208 307 viewing/hiding infordocking port, 5 mation, 205-206 downloading from iTunes Internet connections Store for, 175 applications, 338-339 messages audio files, 100-102, attachments, 205 116-118 blind copies of, 198 video, 100-102 checking for new, 213 driving directions, 364-367 creating contacts Drop Pin command (Maps from, 74-75 application), 367 creating folders in, duplicate contacts, han218 dling, 68 deleting, 198, 214-215

411

forwarding, 212 HTML in, 206 organizing, 216-217 photos, 205, 219 receiving/reading, 203-206 removing email addresses from, 208 replying to, 211 saving without sending, 210 sending, 89, 207, 210 signatures, 198 photos, 205, 219, 316-317, 320, 327 sending, troubleshooting, 186, 406 spam filtering, 219 webpage links with Safari, 248 enabling 24-hour clock, 270 alarms, 283 Auto-Brightness feature, 376 call forwarding, 34 email sounds, 199 snooze function (alarms), 280 TTY support, 36 vibrations (phone settings), 32 ending calls, 45 erasing iPhone, 403 events (calendar) adding, 303 accepting invitations, 304-305 manually, 299-302 alert sounds, 302 deleting, 297 dismissing event alarms, 307 editing, 298 viewing, 295-296

412

Exchange accounts

HTML email messages, 206 general settings, configur- Hybrid view (Maps appliing, 378-380, 383, cation), 367 386-388 Genius playlists, creating, I 142-145 genre, searching music by, iCal, synchronizing with Calendar application, 126-128 294 global email settings, conicons, changing in main figuring, 196-199 toolbar, 372 GMail, POP enabling, 181 F IM (instant messaging), GPS functionality fast-forwarding voicemail, AOL AIM application, 256 current location, find57 images. See photos ing, 359-360 favorites (Internet driving while using, 364 incomplete phone calls, Explorer), transferring to greetings (voicemail), 42 iPhone, 225-228. See information fields, adding recording, 53-54 to contacts, 86 also bookmarks installing applications favorites (iPhone) with adding contacts to, 51, hanging up (conference App Store (iTunes 89 calls), 45 Store), 344 dialing with, 39 headphone port, 5 applications, 346-347 finding headsets, 52 applications in iTunes iTunes, 14 help, resources for, 407 Store, 340 hidden Wi-Fi network con- Internet connections cell account informaBootP or static addressnections, 159-160 tion, 61, 63 ing, 164 hiding current location with 3G networks, 165 caller ID, 35 EDGE networks, 167 Maps application, email address informaemail, 175 359-360 tion, 205 options for, 154 folders (email), creating, message previews, 383 roaming in, 172 218 histories Wi-Fi networks font size (text), setting for Safari, clearing, 239 automatic prompts email messages, 197 websites formatting webpages for to join, 154 clearing, 224 iPhone, 234 broadcast networks, returning to websites forms (Safari), completing, 154-158, 161-162 with, 239-240 250 changing networks, Home screen forwarding email mes162-163 bookmarks (Safari), cresages, 212 forgetting networks, ating on, 247 163-164 customizing, 370, 372 hidden networks, settings, accessing, 373 159-160 viewing, 5 troubleshooting, 157 Exchange accounts calendar synchronization, 290 contact information, moving to iPhone, 67-68 email accounts, configuring manually, 192-193 iPhone configuration, 19

G-H

managing

Internet Explorer, transferinstalling, 14 ring favorites to iPhone, iTunes Store Accounts, 225-228 16 invitations (events), labeling music, 100 304-306 playlists, creating, IP addresses, Wi-Fi net106-110 work connections, 157 reinstalling, 406 iPhone ringtones, creating activating, 13 with, 28-30 battery, charging, smart playlists, 107-110 396-398 tagging music, 100 checking for updates, transferring content to 394 iPhone, 111-115 cleaning, 400 updating, 15, 392-393 erasing, 403 iTunes Store help, resources for, 407 App Store, applications interface, 5-6, 9 finding in, 341-343 locking, 380-381 installing with, 344 resetting, 402-403 configuring settings, restarting, 13, 401 102 restoring, 404-405 downloading synchronizing content applications from, from iTunes Store, 118 338-339 transferring iTunes conaudio files from, tent to, 111-115 100-102, 116-118 troubleshooting, video, 100-102 401-407 movies, renting, 103 turning on/off, 12 podcast subscriptions, unlocking, 11, 381 104-105 iPhoto, moving photos to reviewing applications iPhone, 315-316 in, 343 iPod searching for applicaControl Bar, 132-133 tions, 340 muting for phone calls, synchronizing content, 48 118 settings, configuring, updating applications, 146-150 350 toolbar, configuring, 145-146 J-K-L Widescreen button, 150 JavaScript, disabling, 222 iTunes, 13 albums, viewing, 131 downloading, 14 key indexes for Wi-Fi netimporting audio CDs, work connections, 162 98-99

413

keyboard (virtual), 8 keypad, dialing with, 37

labels custom labels, creating, 82 email headers, viewing in, 198 iTunes music, 100 landscape mode camera, 310 web pages, 237 links (web pages), moving to, 236 Location Services, 360 locking iPhone, 380-381 logins, iTunes Store Accounts, 16

M Mac iTunes updates, checking for, 393 MobileMe account configuration, 21 photos, moving to iPhone, 315, 335 synchronizing with contacts, 70 email accounts, 180 MobileMe calendars, 289 maintenance (iPhone) charging batteries, 396-398 checking for software updates, 394 cleaning screen, 400 managing conference calls, 44 deleted voicemail, 58-59

414

managing

phone calls, 41-42 Recents list, 49-50 manually changing contact information, 91-92 manually configuring email accounts, 181-186, 192-193 manually creating contacts, 78-86 Maps application bookmarks adding, 362 browsing with, 356-358 contacts creating from, 76-77 viewing addresses in, 89 driving directions, 364-367 Drop Pin command, 367 finding current location with, 359-360 Hybrid view, 367 scrolling in, 361 searches in, 353-355 Show Traffic command, 367 unpinching locations, 361 viewing location information, 361 multiple locations, 362 zooming in/out of locations, 361 merging phone calls, 44 synchronized contacts, 71 messages (email). See email, messages

messages (voicemail). See movies voicemail Closed Captioning, 150 messages (instant), 256 iTunes Store, renting messages (text) from, 103 clearing, 265 Widescreen button conversations, 263-266 (iPod settings), 150 deleting, 266 moving. See also synchronetwork plan costs, 256 nizing new message sound, applications to iPhone, enabling/disabling, 340 257 Exchange contact number of, 263 information to receiving, 261-262 iPhone, 67-68 replying to, 261-262 MobileMe bookmarks sending, 258-260 to iPhone, 20 signatures, 198 MobileMe calendar minutes (conference calls), information to charges for, 45 iPhone, 20 missed calls, viewing, 50 MobileMe contact MobileMe accounts information to bookmarks, moving to iPhone, 20, 67-68 iPhone, 20, 231 photos from calendar synchronizaemail to iPhone, tion, 20, 288-290 316-317 contact information, iPhone to a Mac, 335 moving to iPhone, 20, iPhone to a Windows 67-68 PC, 332-334 email accounts, configiPhoto to iPhone, uring with, 177 315-316 Internet Explorer Macs to iPhone, 315 favorites, transferring Windows PC to to iPhone, 227-228 iPhone, 313-314 MAC configurations, 21 ringtones to iPhone, 31 member names, importo links on web pages, tance of, 18 236 obtaining, 18 to previous/later web photos, sending to, 331 pages, 237 Sync Alert dialog, 22 to websites synchronizing, 22 with bookmarks Windows PC configura(Safari), 232-234 tions, 19-20 with URLs, 234-235 More menu, searching multi-touch interface (iPhone), 5-6, 9 music by, 128-129

playlists

music iPod muting in, 48 On-the-Go playlists, 139-141 playing with Control Bar, 133 iTunes creating playlists, 106-110 importing audio CDs, 98-99 labeling music, 100 searches by Cover Flow browser, 119-121 searches by playlist, 122-123 smart playlists, 107-110 transferring music to iPhone, 106-110 viewing albums in, 131 iTunes Store, downloading audio files from, 100-102, 116-118 playing, 129-131 searches by artists, 124-125 Cover Flow browser, 119-121 genre, 126-128 More menu, 128-129 playlists, 122-123 mute on/off switch (iPhone), 5

N-O NTSC format, iPod settings, 150

415

during phone calls, 42 Recents list dialing with, 40-41 managing, 49-50 swapping, 45 photos On-the-Go playlists, contacts 139-141 assigning to, 328-330 organizing associating with, bookmarks (Safari), 78-79 242-245 deleting, 311, 325, 330 email messages, email messages, 205, 216-217 316-317, 320, 327 Outlook, synchronizing landscape mode, 310 with Calendar applicaMobileMe, sending to, tion, 293 331 moving from P email to iPhone, pairing (Bluetooth), 168 316-317 passcodes, enabling/ iPhone to a Mac, 335 disabling, 381 iPhone to a Windows passwords PC, 332, 334 voicemail, 54, 60-61 iPhoto to iPhone, Wi-Fi network connec315-316 tions, 155-156 Macs to iPhone, 315 pausing voicemail, 56 Windows PC to people. See contacts iPhone, 313-314 phone calls screenshots, 318 answering, 46-48 slideshows, 320-324 conference calls, 43-45 synchronizing, 312 contacts, creating from, taking, 309-312 71-72 viewing, 310, 318-320, dialing with 328 contacts, 38, 89 wallpaper, setting as, favorites, 39 326, 378 keypad, 37 PIN settings (SIM), 36 Recents list, 40-41 playlists headset usage, 52 Genius playlists, managing, 41-42 142-145 merging, 44 iTunes, creating in, numbers (phone), 106-110 entering On-the-Go playlists, as text, 8 139-141 numbers (phone), entering as text, 8 during phone calls, 42

416

playlists

searches, 238-239 settings, configuring, 222-225 URL, moving to websites with, 234-235 web forms, completing, 250 web pages emailing links, 248 opening multiple webpages, 251-252 websites, viewing, 236-237 saving bookmarks (Safari), 241-242 email messages without sending, 210 photos attached to email messages, 219 screen Q-R brightness, configuring, Recents list 376 creating contacts from, cleaning, 400 71-72 screenshots, 318 dialing from, 40-41 scrolling S managing, 49-50 map locations, 361 recording voicemail greet- Safari web pages, 236 ings, 53-54 bookmarks search engines (default), refreshing web pages, 237 adding, 247, 362 changing, 222 removing browsing, 356-358 searches callers from conference deleting, 246, 357 applications in iTunes calls, 45 moving MobileMe Store, 340 email addresses from accounts to iPhone, locations, 353, 355 email messages, 208 20 clearing searches, 355 renaming moving to iPhone, current location, bookmarks, 358 228-231 359-360 clocks, 278 moving to websites with bookmarks, renting movies from with, 232-234 356-358 iTunes Store, 103 organizing, 242-245 music with reordering clocks, 278 renaming, 358 artists, 124-125 repeating saving, 241-242 Cover Flow browser, alarms, 279 sorting, 357 119-121 events (calendar), 301 history list, 239-240 genre, 126-128 replaying voicemail, 58 Home screen, 247

searching music with, 122-123 smart playlists, 107-110 plug-ins, disabling, 223 podcasts listening to, 134-135 subscribing from iTunes Store, 104-105 POP enabling, GMail accounts, 181 pop-up blocking, 223 prefixes (U.S. phone numbers), 34 private conversations during conference calls, 45 problems. See troubleshooting push calendar synchronization, 291

replying to email messages, 211 resetting iPhone, 402-403 restarting iPhone, 401 restoring iPhone, 404-405 retrieving email, configuring settings, 195 reversing driving directions, 366 reviewing applications in iTunes Store, 343 rewinding voicemail, 57 ringtones associating with contacts, 82 iPhone, moving to, 31 iTunes, creating with, 28-30 setting, 32 silencing, 47 volume, adjusting, 32 roaming, Internet connections, 172 roaming charges, 36, 172

transferring

More menu, 128-129 playlists, 122-123 Safari, clearing from, 239 videos, 136-137 web searches, 238 security, Wi-Fi network connections, 155-156 Show Traffic command (Maps application), 367 signatures (email messages), 198 silencing ringetones, 47 SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) contacts, importing, 71 PIN setting, 36 Sleep mode, 5, 11 sleep timer, iPhone as, 287 slideshows, 320-324 smart playlists, creating in iTunes, 107-110 SMS (Short Message Service). See text messaging SMTP servers, changing settings, 190 snooze function (alarms), 280 sounds, configuring, 374 alerts, calendar events, 302 alarms, selecting for, 280 email settings, 199 phone settings, 31-33 spam filtering, 219 special characters, entering as text, 8 SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), 184 static addressing, network connections with, 164 stopwatch, iPhone as, 284-285

suggestion feature (text entering), 9 swapping phone calls, 45 Sync Alert dialog (MobileMe), 22 synchronizing. See also moving calendars iCal, 294 MobileMe accounts, 288-290 multiple calendars, 292 Outlook, 293 push calendars, 291 contacts changing contact information with, 90-91 with Mac OS, 70 with Windows, 69 email accounts Mac, 180 MobileMe, 177 Windows, 179 iTunes Store content with iPhone, 118 MobileMe accounts, 22 photos, 312

417

creating contacts from, 75-76 deleting, 266 network plan costs, 256 new message sound, 257 number of, 263 receiving, 261-262 replying to, 261-262 sending, 89, 258-260 time/date settings. See also clocks configuring, 270-275 current time, viewing, 275 displaying, 11 time zones associating cities with clocks, 277 configuring, 271 Time Zone Support feature, 273 timer, iPhone as, 285-287 toolbar (main), changing icons in, 372 traffic, Show Traffic command (Maps application), 367 transferring. See also synchronizing applications to iPhone, T 340 tagging music in iTunes, Exchange contact 100 information to Tell a Friend option (appliiPhone, 67-68 cations), 343 MobileMe bookmarks text, entering in iPhone to iPhone, 20 editing, 10 MobileMe calendar numbers, 8 information to special characters, 8 iPhone, 20 suggestion feature, 9 MobileMe contact text messages information to conversations, 263-264 iPhone, 20, 67-68 clearing, 265 photos from

418

transferring

email to iPhone, 316-317 iPhone to a Mac, 335 iPhone to a Windows PC, 332-334 iPhoto to iPhone, 315-316 Macs to iPhone, 315 Windows PC to iPhone, 313-314 ringtones to iPhone, 31 to links on web pages, 236 to previous/later web pages, 237 to websites with bookmarks (Safari), 232-234 with URLs, 234-235 troubleshooting email, sending, 186, 406 iPhone reinstalling iTunes, 406 resetting iPhone, 402-403 resources for help, 407 restarting iPhone, 401 restoring iPhone, 404-405 Wi-Fi network connections, 157 TTY support, enabling/disabling, 36 turning on/off. See disabling, enabling TV shows, 150

U-V unlocking iPhone, 11, 381 unpinching map locations, 361

unread email messages, 204 updates applications, 347-349 iPhone, 394 iTunes, 392-393 URL (Uniform Resource Locators), moving to websites with, 234-235 USB ports, 403

W

Wake/Sleep button, 5 wallpaper photos as, 326, 378 selecting, 377-378 web browsers. See Internet Explorer; Safari web forms (Safari), completing, 250 web pages iPhone formats, 234 landscape mode, 237 vibrations (phone setlinks, emailing with tings), enabling/ Safari, 248 disabling, 32 loading, stopping from, video 237 deleting, 138-139 moving to iTunes links on, 236 creating playlists in, revious/later pages, 106-110 237 transferring to multiple web pages, iPhone, 106-110 opening in Safari, iTunes Store, down251-252 loading from, 100-102 refreshing, 237 playing, 137-138 scrolling, 236 searching for, 136-137 zooming in/out of, virtual keyboard, 8 236-237 voicemail, 52 web searches, 238, 407 alerts for, 55 websites deleting, 58-59 associating with congreetings, recording, tacts, 83 53-54 help resources, 407 listening to, 56-57 histories managing, 58-59 clearing, 224 passwords for, 54, 60-61 returning to websites replaying, 58 with, 239-240 sending phone calls to, moving to with 47 bookmarks (Safari), volume, adjusting, 5, 12 232-234 alarms, 281 URLs, 234-235 ringtones, 32 viewing, 236-237 VPN (Virtual Private Network) connections, 170-171

zooming in/out of

Wi-Fi network connections AT&T EDGE network connections versus, 221 automatic prompts to join, 154 broadcast networks, 154-158, 161-162 changing networks, 162-163 forgetting networks, 163-164 hidden networks, 159160 troubleshooting, 157 Widescreen button (iPod settings), 150 Windows PC iTunes installing in, 14 updates, 392 MobileMe account configuration, 19-20 moving photos to, 313-314, 332-334 synchronizing with contacts, 69 email accounts, 179 MobileMe calendars, 288 wireless connections. See Bluetooth connections; Wi-Fi network connections

X-Y-Z zooming in/out of map locations, 361 web pages, 236-237

419

FREE Online Edition

Your purchase of My iPhone®, Second Edition includes access to a free online edition for 45 days through the Safari Books Online subscription service. Nearly every Que book is available online through Safari Books Online, along with more than 5,000 other technical books and videos from publishers such as Addison-Wesley Professional, Cisco Press, Exam Cram, IBM Press, O’Reilly, Prentice Hall, and Sams.

SAFARI BOOKS ONLINE allows you to search for a specific answer, cut and paste code, download chapters, and stay current with emerging technologies.

Activate your FREE Online Edition at www.informit.com/safarifree STEP 1: Enter the coupon code: XVSSBWH. STEP 2: New Safari users, complete the brief registration form. Safari subscribers, just log in.

If you have difficulty registering on Safari or accessing the online edition, please e-mail [email protected]